Lucent Technologies CBX 3500 страница 418 Скачать руководство пользователя | Manualshive

Страница: 418 / 888

background image

Beta Draft Confidential

10-4

1/19/05

ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500, CBX 500, GX 550, and B-STDX 9000

Configuring ATM PVCs
PVC Endpoint Rules

PVC Endpoint Rules

can help you determine calling and called endpoints on the switch and

endpoint 1 and endpoint 2 in the NMS when PVCs are created.

Table 10-1.

PVC Endpoint Rules

PVC Type

Switch

NMS

Task

Both circuit endpoints

are fixed

a

(Point-to-point PVC)

1. Higher switch IP
address is always the
caller.

2. If both endpoints are
on the same switch, the
higher interface number
is the caller.

1. Higher IP address is
always endpoint 1 on NMS.

2. If both endpoints are on the
same switch, then higher
interface number is always
endpoint 2 on NMS.

1. See the View PVC dialog box
(described in the Switch Diagnostics
User’s Guide for CBX 3500, CBX
500, GX 550, and B-STDX 9000).

2. Use the

show ospf names

command to find the interface
number.

First endpoint is fixed

a

while second endpoint is

variable

b

and primary

c

Fixed endpoint is always
the caller.

Fixed endpoint is always
designated endpoint 2 in
NMS.

See the View PVC dialog box in
Navis EMS-CBGX (described in
chapter 11 of the Switch Diagnostics
User’s Guide for CBX 3500, CBX
500, GX 550, and B-STDX 9000).

First endpoint is variable
and primary while
second endpoint is fixed

Fixed endpoint is always
the caller.

Fixed endpoint is always
designated endpoint 2 in
NMS.

See the View PVC dialog box in
Navis EMS-CBGX (described in the
Switch Diagnostics User’s Guide for
CBX 3500, CBX 500, GX 550, and
B-STDX 9000).

Both endpoints are
variable and primary

Higher Service Name
Binding (SNB) ID is
always the caller.

Higher SNB ID is designated
as endpoint 2 in NMS.

Use the

Cvlistcontained

command in Provisioning Server to
find the SNB ID.

First endpoint is variable
and primary while
second endpoint is

backed-up

d

Higher variable (SNB)
is always the caller
(even if backed up).

Backed-up endpoint is always
designated endpoint 1 in
NMS.

For the switch, use the

Cvlistcontained

command in

Provisioning Server to find the SNB
ID.

For the NMS, see the View PVC
dialog box (described in the Switch
Diagnostics User’s Guide for CBX
3500, CBX 500, GX 550, and
B-STDX 9000).

First endpoint is backed-
up while second
endpoint is variable and
primary

Sets whatever
configuration that is
given from Navis
EMS-CBGX.

Backed-up endpoint is always
designated endpoint 1 in
NMS.

See the View PVC dialog box in
Navis EMS-CBGX (described in
chapter 11 of the Switch Diagnostics
User’s Guide for CBX 3500, CBX
500, GX 550, and B-STDX 9000).

a

Fixed refers to endpoints that do not have an SNB configured.

b

Variable refers to an endpoint with an SNB on the primary interface.

c

Primary refers to an endpoint that is the primary logical port for an SNB.

d

Backed-up refers to endpoints where a backup logical port is active for an SNB.

«
...
416
417
418
419
420
...
»

Содержание CBX 3500

Страница 1: ...Beta Draft Confidential ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Product Code 80251 Revision 002 January 2005 ...

Страница 2: ...act Technical Publications Data Networking Group at 978 692 2600 Notice Every effort was made to ensure that the information in this document was complete and accurate at the time of printing However information is subject to change Trademarks All trademarks and service marks specified herein are owned by their respective companies Limited Warranty Lucent Technologies provides a limited warranty t...

Страница 3: ...ine readable object code form only the Software and the accompanying User Documentation only as authorized in this License Agreement The Software may be used only on a single computer owned leased or otherwise controlled by you or in the event of inoperability of that computer on a backup computer selected by you You agree that you will not pledge lease rent or share your rights under this License...

Страница 4: ...at during the Warranty Period the Program shall operate substantially in accordance with the User Documentation If during the Warranty Period a defect in the Program appears you may return the Program to the party from which the Program was acquired for either replacement or if so elected by such party refund of amounts paid by you under this License Agreement You agree that the foregoing constitu...

Страница 5: ...is based on i the use of other than the current unaltered release of the Program and Lucent has provided or offers to provide such release to you for its then current license fee or ii use or combination of the Program with programs or data not supplied or approved by Lucent to the extent such use or combination caused the claim 8 Export Control You agree not to export or disclose to anyone except...

Страница 6: ...vi1 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Beta Draft Confidential ...

Страница 7: ... Third Party xlvi Ordering Printed Manuals Online xlvii Customer Comments xlvii Technical Support xlvii Chapter 1 Overview Logical Ports 1 1 ATM FCP 1 2 ATM Trunks 1 2 ATM Over MPLS 1 3 PVCs 1 3 Network wide Features 1 3 Fault tolerant PVCs 1 4 RLMI 1 4 SVCs 1 4 SVC Proxy Signaling 1 5 SPVCs 1 5 CUGs 1 5 Port Security Screening 1 5 PNNI 1 6 CAC 1 6 ATM Traffic Descriptors 1 6 CBX 500 Shared SP Thr...

Страница 8: ...ons 2 9 ATM Direct Trunk 2 10 ATM CE 2 10 ATM NNI 2 11 Virtual UNI NNI 2 11 VPs and VCs 2 12 Setting the Number of Valid Bits in the VPI VCI 2 13 VPI VCI Bit Allocation 2 13 Configuring VCC VPI Start and Stop Values for Virtual UNI NNI 2 16 ATMoMPLS UNI NNI 2 16 About Logical Port Bandwidth 2 16 Modifying Logical Port Bandwidth 2 18 CBX 500 SP Thread Bandwidth Available for Logical Ports 2 18 Abou...

Страница 9: ...nk VPI Range Attributes 3 45 ATM FCP Attributes 3 49 Tunnel VP Shaping Rate Attributes 3 50 QoS Attributes 3 51 Setting QoS Parameters 3 51 Setting SVC QoS Parameters 3 56 Completing the Logical Port Configuration 3 57 Configuring Virtual ATM UNI NNI Logical Ports 3 58 Configuring Logical Ports for Use With ATM SVCs 3 59 Chapter 4 Configuring ATM Logical Ports on Frame based Modules About ATM Logi...

Страница 10: ...al Port Configuration 4 52 Chapter 5 About the ATM FCP Modules Supported 5 2 Supported ATM Service Classes 5 3 ATM FCP Architecture 5 4 Closed loop Flow Control 5 5 Flow Control Mechanisms 5 5 RM Cell Generation 5 6 RM Cell Termination 5 6 CCRM Closed loop Flow Control 5 8 CCRM Closed loop Flow Control on a Trunk 5 8 CCRM Closed loop Flow Control on a UNI Traffic Shaping 5 9 CCRM Cell Generation 5...

Страница 11: ...fair bandwidth determined 6 17 Why does the EPD option only work when enabled for all circuit connections 6 18 Chapter 7 Configuring Trunks About Administrative Cost 7 2 About LTP 7 3 Trunk Delay 7 3 KA Threshold 7 3 Static and Dynamic Delay 7 4 About APS 7 6 APS Options 7 6 CBX 3500 Notes 7 10 Intra card APS 1 1 7 11 APS with Trunk Backup 7 11 APS Resilient UNI 7 12 Fast Inter card APS 1 1 7 12 A...

Страница 12: ...ng VNN OSPF Virtual Links 7 50 Configuring VNN OSPF External Route Aggregates 7 51 Configuring VNN OSPF External Route Aggregates 7 51 Configuring OSPF External Route Aggregates 7 55 Configuring VNN OSPF Optimized Flooding 7 57 About VNN OSPF Optimized Flooding 7 57 Interoperability in Lucent Switch Networks 7 59 Enabling and Disabling VNN OSPF Optimized Flooding 7 59 Configuring VNN OSPF Name LSA...

Страница 13: ...orted Modules 9 4 PWE3 Over an MPLS Core Network 9 5 Supported Modules 9 5 Network wide MPLS Settings 9 7 Configuring MPLS Affinities 9 7 Configuring MPLS Tunnel Hop Lists 9 8 Configuring IntServ and DiffServ Profiles 9 10 Creating IntServ Profiles 9 10 Creating Diffserv Profiles 9 13 Configuring a Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network 9 16 Configuring Node based MPLS Parameters 9 17 Adding a PPP ...

Страница 14: ...es for PVCs 10 9 Configuring an ATM Service PVC 10 9 Accessing PVCs Using Navis EMS CBGX 10 11 Defining a Point to Point Circuit Connection 10 13 About the PVC Tabs 10 16 Administrative Attributes 10 17 How PVC Routing Thresholds Interact With LPort Routing Metrics 10 21 Traffic Type Attributes 10 22 User Preference Attributes 10 26 Traffic Management Attributes 10 31 Completing the PVC Configurat...

Страница 15: ...ultiple Leafs on the Same Physical Port 10 86 Deleting a PMP Circuit Root and Leafs 10 88 Deleting a PMP PVC Leaf 10 88 Deleting a PMP PVC Root 10 88 Moving Circuits 10 89 Using Templates to Define Circuits 10 92 Deleting Circuits 10 92 Chapter 11 Configuring Management Paths Using MPVCs 11 3 Configuring an MPVC 11 4 Defining a Standard MPVC Connection 11 4 Defining a Redirect MPVC Connection 11 7...

Страница 16: ...s Configuring Fault tolerant PVCs 14 2 Creating a Primary Port 14 3 Creating a Backup Port 14 3 Creating Service Names 14 4 Activating a Backup Binding Port 14 6 Returning the Primary LPort to Service 14 9 Using APS With Resilient UNI 14 9 Working Port and Protection Port Configuration Guidelines 14 10 CBX 3500 and CBX 500 Considerations 14 10 GX 550 Considerations 14 10 APS Resilient UNI Over PNN...

Страница 17: ... Management VPCI Table Entry 17 18 Deleting a Management VPCI Table Entry 17 18 Address Attributes for SVCs 17 19 Connection ID Attributes for SVCs 17 26 CUG Attributes for SVCs 17 28 Configuring Node Prefixes 17 30 Defining a Node Prefix 17 31 E 164 Native Node Prefix Format 17 33 DCC and ICD AESA Node Prefix Format 17 34 E 164 AESA Node Prefix Format 17 35 Custom AESA Node Prefix Format 17 37 De...

Страница 18: ... Switch 18 7 Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port 18 8 Selecting the Terminating Endpoint Address 18 8 Configuring Offnet Circuit Parameters 18 11 Administrative Attributes 18 11 Traffic Type Attributes 18 15 User Preference Attributes 18 21 Accounting Attributes 18 22 Path Attributes 18 24 FRF 5 Attributes 18 27 Restarting an Offnet Circuit 18 29 Defining a PMP SPVC Offnet Circuit 18 30 Def...

Страница 19: ...oad Balancing Over Parallel PNNI Links 21 14 PNNI Signaling Overview 21 14 UNI 4 0 Signaling Features 21 15 PNNI and CBX GX PVCs 21 15 Lucent ATM Node Prefix 21 16 Integrating VNN OSPF and PNNI Networks 21 17 PNNI VNN Gateway Support 21 17 Importing Exterior Addresses 21 17 PNNI and VNN OSPF Call Interworking 21 17 Interworking VNN ATM PVCs with PNNI 21 17 E 164 Native Address Advertisement 21 18 ...

Страница 20: ...VC Parameters 21 54 Configuring SPVCs Offnet Circuits Over PNNI 21 55 Configuring MPVCs 21 55 Configuring MSPVCs 21 55 Viewing PNNI Links 21 56 PNNI Trap Support 21 56 Appendix A Adjusting the CAC About the Customizable CAC Options A 3 Customizable CAC Example A 3 Configuring the CAC A 4 Tuning the CAC A 5 Customizing the CAC for VBR RT VBR NRT and ABR A 7 Customizing the CAC for VBR NRT and ABR A...

Страница 21: ...operability With Previous Releases E 5 Priority Routing and Path Cost E 6 Priority Routing and Path Cost Example E 6 Restricted Priority Routing and Path Cost Example E 6 Appendix F Reliable Scalable Circuit Circuit Add Errors F 3 Circuit Modify Errors F 5 Circuit Delete Errors F 6 Appendix G OSPF Name Aggregation About OSPF Name Aggregation G 1 OSPF Names G 1 Name Limitations G 2 Using OSPF Name ...

Страница 22: ...l Appendix I About Trunk Conditioning Structured Service With NxDS0 Bundle I 2 Configuration Values in the Downstream Direction I 3 Configuration Values in the Upstream Direction I 4 Configuration Values for Testing I 4 Unstructured Service With Full DS1 I 5 Abbreviations and Acronyms Abbreviations 1 1 Acronyms 1 3 Index ...

Страница 23: ...nk Signaling Forward Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box 3 43 Figure 3 17 Trunk Signaling Reverse Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box 3 44 Figure 3 18 Add Logical Port VPI Range Tab 3 45 Figure 3 19 Add Logical Port Tunnel VP Shaping Rate Tab 3 50 Figure 3 20 Add Logical Port QoS Tab 3 52 Figure 4 1 Add Logical Port General Tab 4 15 Figure 4 2 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab 4 18 Figure 4 3 Add Logical Po...

Страница 24: ... Box 7 45 Figure 7 18 View Details Dialog Box PSAX 7 45 Figure 7 19 Add VNN Loop back Address Dialog Box 7 48 Figure 7 20 Add VNN Area Aggregate Dialog Box 7 48 Figure 7 21 Add VNN Virtual Link Dialog Box 7 50 Figure 7 22 Add VNN External route Aggregation Dialog Box 7 52 Figure 7 23 Add OSPF External route Aggregation Dialog Box 7 55 Figure 7 24 Modify Switch Dialog Box 7 59 Figure 8 1 One Licens...

Страница 25: ... Port Congestion Control Tab 9 30 Figure 9 15 Add Logical Port Point to Point Tab 9 31 Figure 9 16 Add IP Lport Dialog Box 9 32 Figure 9 17 RsvpTE Instance Node in Switch Tab 9 34 Figure 9 18 Modify RsvpTE Dialog Box 9 35 Figure 9 19 Add IP Interface Address Dialog Box 9 38 Figure 9 20 Add OSPF IP Interface Dialog Box 9 40 Figure 9 21 Add Tunnel General Tab 9 44 Figure 9 22 Add Tunnel General Tab ...

Страница 26: ...x 10 90 Figure 10 31 Select Endpoints Dialog Box 10 91 Figure 10 32 Adding a PVC Based on a Template 10 92 Figure 11 1 Connecting a PNNI Network 11 2 Figure 11 2 Add PVC Dialog Box MPVC 11 5 Figure 11 3 Add Management VPI VCI Dialog Box 11 9 Figure 11 4 Add Offnet Circuit Dialog Box 11 12 Figure 11 5 Offnet EndPoint Selection Dialog Box 11 13 Figure 11 6 Add NMS path Dialog Box 11 15 Figure 12 1 N...

Страница 27: ...og Box 17 31 Figure 17 15 Add SVC Node Prefix E 164 Native Format 17 33 Figure 17 16 Add Node Prefix DCC or ICD AESA Format 17 34 Figure 17 17 Add SVC Node Prefix E 164 AESA Format 17 35 Figure 17 18 Add SVC Node Prefix Custom AESA Format 17 37 Figure 17 19 Add SVC Port Prefix Dialog Box 17 41 Figure 17 20 Add SVC Port Prefix E 164 Native Format 17 43 Figure 17 21 Add SVC Port Prefix DCC and ICD A...

Страница 28: ...UG Member Dialog Box 19 8 Figure 19 4 Defining a CUG 19 9 Figure 19 5 Add CUG Dialog Box 19 9 Figure 20 1 Adding a Security Screen 20 8 Figure 20 2 Add Security Screen Dialog Box 20 9 Figure 20 3 Assigning a Security Screen to a Logical Port 20 11 Figure 20 4 Activate and Assign Security Screen Default Screen Tab 20 11 Figure 20 5 Activate and Assign Security Screen Assigned Screens Tab 20 13 Figu...

Страница 29: ... 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 05xxix Beta Draft Confidential Figure H 3 Assigning a Logical Port to a Layer 2 VPN Customer Name H 3 Figure H 4 Choose VPN Policy Dialog Box H 3 Figure H 5 Select Layer2 Customer VPN View Dialog Box H 4 Figure I 1 Typical CE Application I 1 ...

Страница 30: ...pe 4 9 Table 4 3 Maximum Multi Class Service Thresholds per Card Type 4 9 Table 4 4 Add Logical Port Tabs 4 11 Table 4 5 Configuring ATM Logical Port Types 4 14 Table 4 6 Add Logical Port General Tab Fields 4 16 Table 4 7 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab Fields 4 19 Table 4 8 Configuring UNI DCE DTE Attributes 4 20 Table 4 9 Add Logical Port ATM Tab Fields 4 22 Table 4 10 Add Logical Port ILMI ...

Страница 31: ...witch Guidelines 9 6 Table 9 2 Add Hoplist Dialog Box Fields 9 9 Table 9 3 Add IntServ Dialog Box Fields 9 12 Table 9 4 Add DiffServ Dialog Box Fields 9 14 Table 9 5 Modify Switch MPLS Tab Fields 9 18 Table 9 6 Add Logical Port Dialog Box Tabs 9 20 Table 9 7 Add Logical Port General Tab Fields for POS LPorts 9 21 Table 9 8 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab Fields for POS LPorts 9 23 Table 9 9 Ad...

Страница 32: ...ontrol Channel TD Defaults 12 15 Table 12 8 PNNI Routing Control Channel TDs 12 16 Table 13 1 Add VPN Dialog Box Fields 13 5 Table 13 2 Add Customer Dialog Box Fields 13 6 Table 14 1 Add Service Name Add RNNI UNI Service Name Fields 14 5 Table 15 1 RLMI Terms 15 3 Table 16 1 AFI Default Values 16 4 Table 16 2 IDI Default Values 16 5 Table 16 3 HO DSP Default Values 16 5 Table 16 4 Route Determinat...

Страница 33: ... 6 Table 19 4 Add SVC CUG Member Dialog Box 19 8 Table 20 1 Default Screens 20 3 Table 20 2 Security Screens 20 5 Table 20 3 Add Security Screen Dialog Box 20 9 Table 20 4 Activate and Assign Security Screen Dialog Box 20 12 Table 21 1 Supported PNNI Features 21 2 Table 21 2 Modify Switch Reroute Tuning Tab Fields 21 24 Table 21 3 Add VPN General Tab Fields 21 34 Table 21 4 Add PNNI Node Dialog Bo...

Страница 34: ...raft Confidential Table I 1 Trunk Conditioning Recommended Tx and Rx Values I 2 Table I 2 Example of Trunk Conditioning Values in Downstream Direction I 3 Table I 3 Example of Rx Trunk Conditioning Values in Upstream Direction I 4 Table I 4 Example of Tx Trunk Conditioning Values in Upstream Direction I 5 ...

Страница 35: ...rt ATM services on the following Lucent Multiservice switches CBX 3500TM CBX 500 GX 550 B STDX 9000 This guide also explains how to configure a variety of features that enhance the ATM service platform including Virtual Private Networks VPNs closed user groups CUGs and port security screening This guide supports the following Network Management System NMS and switch software releases Navis EMS CBG...

Страница 36: ...tional database software to properly maintain Sybase which is the database used by Navis EMS CBGX This guide assumes you have already installed the Lucent switch hardware Network Management Station NMS and switch software See the Related Documents section of this preface for a list of documents that describe these and other tasks Be sure to read the Software Release Notice SRN that accompanies eac...

Страница 37: ... describe how to install and set up the switch hardware replace hardware modules and interpret LED indicators This guide describes prerequisite tasks hardware and software requirements and instructions for installing and upgrading Solaris and Navis EMS CBGX on the NMS Switch Hardware Installation Guides Installation and Administration Guide This guide describes how to start the Navis EMS CBGX clie...

Страница 38: ...des The following guides describe how to configure WAN services on the supported switch platforms Frame Relay Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 and B STDX 9000 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 IP Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 and B STDX 9000 This guide describes procedures for upgrading a Lucent switch to the current r...

Страница 39: ... Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 05xxxix Beta Draft Confidential This guide contains reference lists and describes the switch console commands Console Command User s Reference ...

Страница 40: ... and external trunks This chapter also describes adding external objects to the Navis EMS CBGX map Chapter 8 Configuring ATM over MPLS trunks via Juniper T series routers and JUNOS Chapter 9 Configuring end to end solutions over an IP MPLS core network This chapter describes the use of Layer 2 tunnels and Pseudo Wire Edge to Edge Encapsulation PWE3 Chapter 10 Configuring point to point point to mu...

Страница 41: ...tgoing calls Chapter 21 Configuring the ATM Private Network to Network Interface PNNI routing protocol in your Lucent network Appendix A Tuning the Call Master Connection Admission Control CAC to achieve a desired cell loss ratio objective across all physical ports in your network Appendix B How each traffic descriptor TD combination affects the cell streams under different traffic conditions Appe...

Страница 42: ...5 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 About This Guide Beta Draft Confidential Abbreviations and Acronyms Abbreviations and acronyms used in this guide Read To Learn About ...

Страница 43: ...release 16 Port OC 3 STM 1 ATM 4 Port OC 12c STM 4 ATM POS 1 Port OC 48c STM 16 ATM POS 24 Port DS3 ATM 1 Port Channelized STM1 E1 ATM with IMA Enhanced 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 ATM with IMA Enhanced Throughout Adding network objects to the map The Navis EMS CBGX network map provides a graphical representation of your network A variety of device objects such as a switch or router can be added to r...

Страница 44: ...y Courier Italics Variable text output cdrompath docs atmcfg pdf Courier Bold User input show ospf names Menu Option A selection from a menu Actions Monitor Italics Book titles new terms and emphasized text Frame Relay Services Configuration Guide A box around text A note caution or warning See examples below Note Notes provide additional information or helpful suggestions that may apply to the su...

Страница 45: ...500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Product Code 80257 Frame Relay Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 and B STDX 9000 Product Code 80252 IP Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 and B STDX 9000 Product Code 80258 Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Product Code 80255 Console Command User s Reference for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 90...

Страница 46: ...6 NavisXtend Database Standby Server Release 09 03 00 00 User s Guide Product Code 86008 NavisXtend Provisioning Server Legacy C API Reference Product Code 80163 Navis EMS CBGX TMF 814 Adapter Implementation Reference Product Code 86011 Navis EMS CBGX TMF 814 Adapter Installation and Administration Guide Product Code 86012 All manuals for the Data Networking Group and the Master Glossary are avail...

Страница 47: ... Comments Customer comments are welcome Please respond in one of the following ways Fill out the Customer Comments Form located at the back of this guide and return it to us E mail your comments to cspubs lucent com Technical Support The Lucent Technical Assistance Center TAC is available to assist you with any problems encountered while using this Lucent product Log on to our Customer Support web...

Страница 48: ...xlviii1 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 About This Guide Beta Draft Confidential ...

Страница 49: ... UNI concepts such as ILMI and signaling or if you need more information on ATM VPI VCI addresses This chapter also describes the administrative tasks you perform for all logical ports Chapter 3 describes how to configure ATM logical ports on a CBX 3500 CBX 500 or GX 550 Multiservice switch platform This chapter includes information on configuring the logical port options you need if you plan to u...

Страница 50: ...esponse to resource management RM cell feedback Reducing congestion in the network by adjusting the data rate at which a VC sends cells fair resource allocation based on the minimum cell rate MCR Per VC queuing with early packet discard partial packet discard EPD PPD capability Chapter 6 provides step by step instructions for configuring the ATM FCP as well as answers to frequently asked questions...

Страница 51: ...de Features The following chapters explain how to configure features that you can use throughout your ATM network Chapter 12 describes how the CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 use traffic descriptors to define a service contract that guarantees that a specified amount of data is delivered You configure a set of traffic descriptors that you can use when you define PVCs throughout your ATM network this c...

Страница 52: ...cal modules you can configure a PVC to automatically revert to the backup port if the primary port fails RLMI Chapter 15 describes the Frame Relay Resilient Link Management Interface RLMI feature and how to configure RLMI on ATM Network Interworking for Frame Relay NNI logical ports on ATM IWU and ATM CS cards RLMI provides resiliency by monitoring Link Management Interface LMI link status RLMI en...

Страница 53: ...ia a proxy signaling agent PSA The PSA performs all signaling functions on behalf of the end system known as the proxy signaling client PSC SPVCs Chapter 18 describes soft permanent virtual circuits SPVCs also called Offnet Circuits The network uses signaling to establish an SPVC The NMS provisions one end of the SPVC with the address identifying the egress interface from the network Once the SPVC...

Страница 54: ... ATM cards on the CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 It is also responsible for bandwidth allocation on all frame cards with the priority frame capability ATM Traffic Descriptors Appendix B describes how each traffic descriptor combination affects the cell streams under different traffic conditions When you create either a PVC or a PMP circuit you select one of several traffic descriptor comb...

Страница 55: ...are applied once QoS class is established Keep in mind that you must assign a higher priority to real time QoS classes Reliable Scalable Circuit Appendix F lists the Network Management Station NMS Simple Network Management Protocol SNMP set errors that can occur during Circuit Add Modify and Delete operations for standard and redirect permanent virtual circuits PVCs When you perform these operatio...

Страница 56: ...view Trunk Conditioning Trunk Conditioning Appendix I describes trunk conditioning used on the CBX 500 60 Port Channelized T1 E1 Circuit Emulation module Abbreviations and Acronyms Abbreviations and Acronyms lists abbreviations for units of measure in specifications and terms and acronyms used in Lucent documentation ...

Страница 57: ...describes ATM concepts you need to understand before you can configure ATM services for a Lucent Multiservice WAN switch For details on configuring an ATM NNI logical port for PNNI routing see Chapter 21 Note The B STDX 9000 switch does not support all ATM features For specific information about the B STDX 9000 ATM implementation see Chapter 4 ...

Страница 58: ...MoMPLS UNI NNI For information about the logical port types you can configure on B STDX 9000 CBX 3500 or CBX 500 frame based modules see Chapter 4 Configuring ATM Logical Ports on Frame based Modules Note You can configure logical ports on an individual E1 channel only if the channel is not IMA enabled that is not configured as an IMA link in an IMA group You cannot define a logical port directly ...

Страница 59: ...im Inter switch Signaling Protocol IISP 3 0 and 3 1 You use the ATM UNI DCE logical port type to communicate with most ATM CPE An ATM UNI DCE logical port represents the network side equipment This logical port supports all types of PVCs as well as SVCs For SVC applications the ATM UNI DCE logical port assumes the role of the network side of the UNI signaling interface You can also use the ATM UNI...

Страница 60: ...ry demand does not exist yet to support this feature and no current CPE device supports this feature The actual implementation of LIJ will likely correspond with the implementation of PNNI Version 2 0 which also introduces support of this feature 5 ATM Anycast 6 ABR signaling for point to point calls 7 Generic identifier transport 8 Virtual UNIs 9 Switched VP service 10 Proxy signaling 11 Frame di...

Страница 61: ... logical port and the attached device supports ILMI Lucent recommends that you enable ILMI support before you provision circuits Under certain conditions enabling ILMI after you provision circuits on a logical port may cause negative bandwidth with the associated QoS classes including constant bit rate CBR Table 2 2 describes the differences between UNI DCE and UNI DTE logical ports with ILMI enab...

Страница 62: ...ble ILMI on the ILMI OAM tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box For information about enabling ILMI for logical ports see Chapter 3 Configuring CBX or GX Logical Ports and Chapter 4 Configuring ATM Logical Ports on Frame based Modules Using Logical Port Signaling This section describes the default signaling tuning parameters for an ATM UNI logical port In an ATM network signaling is responsible fo...

Страница 63: ...l circuit as a VCL between the logical port and the internal switch processor When you configure a control circuit the switch creates a VCL between this port and the switch processor The logical port uses the forward TD to police traffic flowing into the switch UNI ILMI and signaling control channels only It uses the backward TD to determine the service category and equivalent bandwidth for the co...

Страница 64: ...col can run Controls the valid range of virtual path identifier virtual channel identifier VPI VCI values that you can use Using switch software release 3 0 or greater on the CBX 500 switch 9 2 or greater for the CBX 3500 switch and 1 0 or greater on the GX 550 switch enables VPCs to traverse OPTimum trunks This capability depends on the logical port configuration as well as the configuration of t...

Страница 65: ...e ATM UNI feeder port is 4 The VPI value is set to 0 Using these assumptions if you want to configure two VPIs on the OPTimum trunk to support PVC SVC or SPVC VPC circuits you could specify a VPC VPI start of 1 and a VPC VCI stop of 2 IP related Connections You can configure label switch paths LSPs over OPTimum cell trunks on B STDX 9000 CBX 3500 and CBX 500 switches This is done differently depen...

Страница 66: ...e following 60 port Channelized T1 E1 CE IOM GX 550 ES DS3 CE Transport card physical port You can configure one ATM CE logical port on each DS3 physical port The ATM CE logical port can be used as a PVC endpoint The ATM CE physical port logical port and circuit are used to provide an unstructured DS3 service that emulates a point to point DS3 circuit configuration The CE service enables two devic...

Страница 67: ... af pnni 0055 000 available from the ATM Forum s web site http www atmforum com Virtual UNI NNI A virtual UNI NNI forms an extension of the standard direct UNI DCE DTE or NNI logical port types In an ATM network you can use virtual UNI NNI logical ports to enable VP tunneling or to connect to a VP multiplexer VP tunneling allows you to connect two switches using signaling via a virtual path throug...

Страница 68: ...rtain level of QoS A VP is a group of VCs carried between two points VPs provide a way to bundle traffic headed in the same direction VPIs and VCIs are hardware addressing identifiers similar to Frame Relay s Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI that route cell traffic The ATM cell header contains both a VPI and a VCI which gives an ATM cell a unique VCI and associates it with a particular VP Ever...

Страница 69: ...s provide VPI 0 15 and VCI 32 1023 If you use this logical port as a feeder for OPTimum trunks or virtual UNIs the VPI value limits the number of OPTimum trunks you can create on this physical port The VCI value limits the number of circuits you can route over each OPTimum trunk This OPTimum trunk circuit trade off is shown by the following formulas For example if you set the VPI value to 3 and th...

Страница 70: ...the logical ports must match the VPI of the VPC that provides the connectivity between the two switches The VPI range for the VPI VCI valid bits setting for each endpoint must accommodate this VPI Table 2 3 Number of Valid Bits in VPI VCI for CBX 500 or CBX 3500 If Number of Valid VPI Bits a Valid VPI Range Is If Number of Valid VCI Bits Valid VCI Range Isb 0 0 0 Not Valid 1 0 1 1 Not Valid 2 0 3 ...

Страница 71: ...ilable on UNI type interfaces per ATM Forum standards Valid VPI Range Is If Number of Valid VCI Bits Valid VCI Range Isb b VCI 0 31 are reserved and should not be used for user traffic per ATM Forum standards 0 0 0 Not Valid 1 0 1 1 Not Valid 2 0 3 2 Not Valid 3 0 7 3 Not Valid 4 0 15 4 Not Valid 5 0 31 5 Not Valid 6 0 63 6 32 63 7 0 127 7 32 127 8 0 255 8 32 255 9 0 511 9 32 511 10 0 1023 10 32 1...

Страница 72: ...in Figure 2 2 on page 2 12 In this case all available VPIs can be used for either signaled VCCs or VPCs of any QoS class The restrictions described above only apply to SVCs When using virtual UNI NNIs in conjunction with PVCs there are no restrictions and the Connection Type field on the logical port is not used ATMoMPLS UNI NNI The CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 ATMoMPLS UNI or NNI logical port type...

Страница 73: ...um Logical Port Bandwidth cps OC 12c STM 4 622080 599040 1412830 19 599040 1412830 OC 3c STM 1 155520 149760 353207 55 149760 353207 OC 48c STM 16 2488320 2396160 5651320 76 2396160 5651320 ATM DS3 with Physical Layer Convergence Protocol PLCP 44736 40704 96000 40704 96000 ATM DS3 with header check sequence HCS direct mapping 44736 44209 694 104268 15 44209 104266 ATM E3 with HCS direct mapping 34...

Страница 74: ...dwidth such that each SP fabric thread is limited to 599 040 Mbps This enforcement ensures that service is guaranteed even when two IOMs are placed on the same SP fabric thread The 599 040 Mbps number is derived from the maximum user cell bandwidth that the OC 12c STM 4 interface supports the OC 12c STM 4 physical layer bandwidth is 622 080 Mbps but the maximum user traffic that any OC 12c STM 4 p...

Страница 75: ...tuations For the variable bit rate non real time VBR NRT queue if a number of trunks fail PVC rerouting may cause the available virtual bandwidth value to become negative Existing PVCs can be rerouted over a negative virtual bandwidth trunk However new PVCs cannot traverse trunks that have a negative virtual bandwidth Any PVC that fails during the time of the reroute is considered to be a new PVC ...

Страница 76: ...for appropriate revision levels Shaping is performed by assigning each VP a single queue on the FCP Shaping is performed on all cells belonging to the OPTimum trunk VP at the specified OPTimum trunk shaping rate Each of the VPs tunnel VPs are shaped at a rate that is different from the opt trunk shaping rate SR and does not consume it You can configure the tunnel VP shaping rate on the Tunnel VP S...

Страница 77: ...o provide egress traffic shaping The VP shaping feature enables multiple VPs that are destined to multiple endpoints to be shaped from a single physical port at the egress Traffic is shaped based on a user defined shaping rate that is defined on the Add Logical Port dialog box during logical port configuration VP shaping on the GX 550 BIO2 or BIO C module Enables GX 550 traffic sent to your networ...

Страница 78: ...plan to enable VP shaping on virtual UNI logical ports Lucent recommends that you set the VP shaping attribute before configuring circuits on the logical port To modify the VP shaping mode for GX 550 virtual UNI logical ports on which circuits are provisioned use the procedure described in Modifying the VP Shaping Mode on GX 550 Virtual UNI Logical Ports on page 3 27 VP Shaping is not available wh...

Страница 79: ...nfiguration and saved it as a template see Template field on page 3 19 you can define a new logical port using the same parameters To define a logical port from a template 1 Expand the instance node for the PPort subport channel card Multilink Frame Relay MLFR type LPort or IMA group to which you want to add an LPort The LPorts class node appears under the PPort or subport instance node 2 Perform ...

Страница 80: ...e Dialog Box 3 Select the LPort template to use from the list of available LPort templates and choose OK 4 The Add Logical Port dialog box displays Figure 3 5 on page 3 8 with the same values as the selected template logical port except for Name Alias and other unique values Complete the fields as defined in Chapter 3 Configuring CBX or GX Logical Ports to configure the logical port ...

Страница 81: ...nterrupting network traffic Non disruptive attributes appear in bold italicized text on Navis EMS CBGX dialog boxes Table 2 6 lists the non disruptive logical port and trunk attributes with references to additional information This guide does not illustrate all the dialog boxes that can display these attributes Note When you modify any attributes other than non disruptive attributes the NMS will b...

Страница 82: ... for information about configuring these parameters CBR VBR RT VBR NRT ABR UBR Routing Metric Options and Oversubscription Setting QoS Parameters on page 3 51 Hold Down Timer 0 255 Setting Logical Port Attributes on page 3 14 Discard Priority Mapping DE CLP and Congestion Mapping FECN EFCI Discard Congestion Mapping Attributes on page 4 47 LMI Update Delay Link Management Attributes on page 4 43 C...

Страница 83: ... and select the desired circuit 3 Perform one of the following Select Delete from the Actions menu Choose the Delete button from the toolbar Right click on the circuit type node and select Delete from the pop up menu A dialog box asks if you are sure you want to delete the selected item 4 Choose OK Customer Name Configuring a Logical Port for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 Associating a Logical Port Wit...

Страница 84: ...ch you want to delete a Management VPI VCI The Mgmt VPI VCI class node appears under the LPort instance node 2 Expand the Mgmt VPI VCI class node 3 Right click on the instance node for the Management VPI VCI you want to delete and select Delete from the pop up menu A message appears that asks if you are sure you want to delete the Management VPI VCI 4 Choose Yes Deleting Logical Ports To delete an...

Страница 85: ...rts on a CBX 500 CBX 3500 or GX 550 Multiservice switch For additional configuration information and a description of Lucent s ATM logical port service see the following chapters For an overview of ATM logical port service see Chapter 2 For information about configuring ATM logical ports on a B STDX 9000 switch see Chapter 4 For details on configuring an ATM NNI logical port for PNNI routing see C...

Страница 86: ...t upon which you want to create the logical port See Defining a Logical Port on page 3 9 View or modify existing logical ports by choosing the LPorts node in the Switch tab or choosing the Cards node to view logical ports based on card and physical port Right click on the LPort and select View or Modify from the pop up menu Accessing LPorts in the Switch Tab To access the Switch tab 1 Log in to Na...

Страница 87: ...e detail panel on the right hand side of the window When you select an LPort on the left hand side of the Navis EMS CBGX window the detail panel on the right hand side displays Name Unique alphanumeric name that identifies the logical port Admin Status Administrative state of the port as Up or Down IF Index Interface number of the logical port Slot Port Slot and port numbers of the physical port o...

Страница 88: ... more information Customer Name of the customer to which this logical port is dedicated The default name is Public Adding an ATM Logical Port To add an ATM logical port 1 Open the object tree for a switch a In the Network object tree expand the instance node for the network that contains the switch see Figure 3 3 Figure 3 3 Navis EMS CBGX Network Object Tree b Expand the Switches class node and do...

Страница 89: ... see the LPorts on the specific PPort 2 Perform one of the following sets of steps depending on your configuration To define the logical port for a CBX 3500 and CBX 500 IMA modules Module Configuration Steps DS1 T1 channel 3 port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM 1 Expand the IMA card instance node then expand the PPorts class node 2 Expand the DS1 Channels E1 Channels class node then the DS1 Channel E1 C...

Страница 90: ... node to display the slot containing the 1 port SW Down Link module b Expand the PPorts class node then the PPort instance node IMA group 3 port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM 1 Expand the 3 port Channelized DS3 ATM IMA instance node then expand the PPorts class node 2 Expand the IMA Groups class node then the IMA group instance node 3 port Channelized DS3 1 ATM w IMA Enhanced IOM 1 port Channelized ST...

Страница 91: ...e logical port for any other I O module IOM a Expand the instance node for the card to which you want to add an LPort b Expand the PPorts class node then the PPort instance node 3 Right click on the LPorts class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Logical Port dialog box appears see Figure 3 5 Note The product formerly called the GX 250 Multiservice Extender is now referred to as the ...

Страница 92: ... will be automatically selected for ATM based logical ports ATM CE will be automatically selected for ATM circuit emulation CE logical ports Other will be automatically selected for logical ports on POS cards which will also default to an LPort Type of Point to Point 6 In the LPort Type field select the ATM logical port type you want to configure from the pull down list The available options in th...

Страница 93: ...ypes of ATM logical ports Before you begin to define logical ports read Setting Logical Port Attributes on page 3 14 General Attributes on page 3 16 Administrative Attributes on page 3 20 Note If you are configuring a logical port on a 4 port DS3 CE or 60 port T1 E1 CE physical port the Service Type and LPort Type default to ATM CE For instructions on configuring an ATM NNI logical port for use wi...

Страница 94: ...re 3 6 Modifying a Logical Port When you right click on a logical port the following commands are available from the popup menu ATM OPTimum Trunk Traffic Descriptor Attributes on page 3 41 OPTimum Trunk VPI Range Attributes on page 3 45 Point to Point Optional QoS Attributes on page 3 51 Trap Control Attributes on page 9 26 MPLS Attributes for POS LPorts on page 9 28 Congestion Control Attributes ...

Страница 95: ...to manage SVCs See Configuring Logical Ports for Use With ATM SVCs on page 3 59 SVC QoS Parameters Enables you to view LPort SVC QoS statistics Refer to the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Show ILMI Addresses Displays a list of ILMI addresses associated with this logical port Delete all failed SVCs Clears the list of failed SVCs for the LPort View the li...

Страница 96: ... GX Logical Ports Working With ATM Logical Ports Figure 3 7 Modify Logical Port Dialog Box 4 Use the tabs in the Add Logical Port dialog box to configure the logical port See Table 3 1 on page 3 9 for references to information about configuring specific types of ATM logical ports 5 When you have configured the logical port click OK ...

Страница 97: ...TDX 9000 1 19 053 13 6 Optionally perform the following configuration tasks To configure this logical port for a specific Layer2 VPN and customer see Configuring a Logical Port for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 If you plan to configure SVC addresses for this logical port continue with the instructions in Configuring Logical Ports for Use With ATM SVCs on page 3 59 ...

Страница 98: ...wing attributes ILMI A Management Information Base MIB that provides status and communication information to ATM UNI devices and provides for a port keep alive protocol This selection also provides an option to configure the traffic characteristics for the Interim Local Management Interface ILMI control channel OAM A parameter that enables the logical port to generate Operations Administration and...

Страница 99: ...tion Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Link Management Displays the fields used to configure Link Management such as protocol LMI update delay DCE DTE and Resilient Link Management Interface RLMI binding ATM Network Interworking for FR NNI only See the Frame Relay Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Trap Control Sets the threshold for the number...

Страница 100: ...Add Logical Port General Tab Fields Field Action Description Admin Status Set the Admin Status as follows Up default Activates the port Down Saves the configuration in the database without activating the port or takes the port offline to run diagnostics When only one logical port exists on a physical port and you set the admin status for the logical port to Down the physical port is also considere...

Страница 101: ... between 1 and 31 for the 30 TS0 channels available per physical port in E1 mode TS0 0 is not used For structured service there is only one LPort per Nx64 or DS0 bundle The timeslots are specified when configuring the LPort This field contains the Trunk ID bits for the following LPort types ATMoMPLS UNI range 1 3 default of 3 ATMoMPLS NNI range 1 5 default of 5 Redirect PVC Delay Time 0 255 Enter ...

Страница 102: ...naged during trunk overflow or failure conditions This feature is used with Layer2 VPN To assign this logical port to a specific Layer2 VPN and customer see Configuring a Logical Port for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 Select one of the following options Public default SVCs originating from this port are routed over dedicated Layer2 VPN trunks However in the event of failure the customer s traffic is al...

Страница 103: ... destination the signalling will retry the same path using Addendum af cs 0127 SPVC IE support Addendum 127 Indicates that the SPVC IE signalling is always based on Addendum af cs 0127 SPVC IE support Template Optional Saves these settings as a template to configure another logical port with similar options To create a template check the box Clear the box default if you do not wish to save the set...

Страница 104: ...GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring CBX or GX Logical Ports Setting Logical Port Attributes Administrative Attributes From the Add Logical Port dialog box select the Administrative tab Figure 3 9 and complete the fields as described in Table 3 3 Figure 3 9 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab ...

Страница 105: ...al port with a minimal amount of bandwidth For specific guidelines on configuring bandwidth with the various physical port types see page 2 18 VP Shaping Enables or disables VP shaping which provides a method for traffic sent over a Lucent switch through another network to comply with the purchased traffic contract in that other network The ATM FCP functions shape individual cell trunk or virtual ...

Страница 106: ...GX 550 Virtual UNI Logical Ports on page 3 27 When you enable VP shaping for a logical port on the GX 550 BIO2 module the VP Shaping Rate field is read only The VP shaping rate is automatically calculated based on the Bandwidth entered in the Bandwidth Kbps field described earlier in this table VP Shaping is not available when the BIO C channelization mode is set to 48 x STS 1 You cannot enable VP...

Страница 107: ...nformation for circuits that pass through this logical port Crankback information is information about dynamic rerouting of call setups around failed nodes or links or links with insufficient resources on the traced path Clear the check box default to disable crankback information collection Pass Along Request Select the check box to enable default pass along request for circuits that pass through...

Страница 108: ...ng in through this LPort will not be honored This switch will not add any trace information and will not forward the trace request any further If it is set on the outgoing port then this node will be the trace destination node When this LPort is the outgoing LPort for a call then it is assumed that the path trace request has reached its destination and has completed normally This switch will add i...

Страница 109: ...irtual ATM UNI Logical Port Configuration Considerations To configure a virtual ATM UNI logical port see Configuring Virtual ATM UNI NNI Logical Ports on page 3 58 In addition be aware of the special considerations described in the following sections Configuring the VPI The VPI is the identifier used for all VCC circuits routed over the virtual UNI The range of valid VPI values depends upon the nu...

Страница 110: ... Network Connection Type it implies a network scenario as shown in Figure 2 1 on page 2 11 In this case the first VPI is used for VCCs only Additional VPIs can only be used for signaled VPCs with the best effort QoS If the logical port is set to the Network Endsystem Connection Type it implies a network scenario as shown in Figure 2 2 on page 2 12 In this case all available VPIs can be used for ei...

Страница 111: ...ts 1 Follow the steps described in Deleting Circuits on page 2 27 to delete all circuits provisioned on the virtual UNI logical port 2 Follow the steps described in Defining a Logical Port on page 3 9 to access the VP Shaping field in the Add Logical Port dialog box for the virtual UNI logical port Modify the configured VP Shaping mode as needed by enabling or disabling the option 3 Re create the ...

Страница 112: ...CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring CBX or GX Logical Ports Setting Logical Port Attributes Figure 3 10 Add Logical Port ATM Tab UNI Logical Ports Note For the ATM Direct Trunk logical port type the Valid Bits VCI field is the only field you need to configure ...

Страница 113: ...but you will not use ILMI address registration Network Endsystem Port connects to a router or host UNI DCE ports only If this port connects to a customer premise equipment CPE device a compliant configured node prefix will be sent over the ILMI channel to the device for ILMI address registration Network Network Port connects to another switch or an end system If this port connects to another netwo...

Страница 114: ...VCs on the trunk The default value of 10 is the most efficient usage of the connection entry resource for OC3 ports A value of 12 is the most efficient usage of the connection entry resource for OC 12c STM 4 and OC 48 STM 16 ports VCC VPI Start 1 15 Virtual UNI NNI OPTimum Trunk Identifies the VP for the ATM logical port Enter a number from zero 0 nnn This is the VPI used for all circuits routed o...

Страница 115: ...is connection attaches to a public network Select Private if this connection resides completely within a private network Cell Header Format UNI DCE DTE and NNI This field controls the number of VPI bits in the ATM cell header for VPCs on the CBX 3500 CBX 500 and VCCs and VPCs on the GX 550 Select UNI to use a range of zero 0 through 8 Select NNI to use valid bits in a VPI range of zero 0 through 1...

Страница 116: ...or increasing the cell loss ratio on network circuits For this reason Lucent recommends that you leave the UPC function enabled on all logical ports Enabled with ABR Enables the UPC function for circuits on this logical port for all QoS classes including ABR For information on UPC traffic parameters see Chapter 12 Configuring ATM Traffic Descriptors Control UPC Function UNI DCE DTE Enables or disa...

Страница 117: ...ed on the network due to the potential for increasing the cell loss ratio on network circuits With NPC disabled Lucent recommends that all ATM UNI ports have UPC enabled Traffic entering the network should have traffic shaping performed Enabled with ABR Enables the NPC function for circuits on this logical port for all QoS classes including ABR For information on NPC traffic parameters see Chapter...

Страница 118: ...roxy NNI logical ports configured for BICI 1 1 support OAM and Proxy Signaling only ATM UNI logical ports configured for Fast Automatic Protection Switching APS support ILMI OAM and UNI Signaling For more information about ILMI and Signaling see page 2 5 See Chapter 16 Configuring SVC Proxy Signaling for instructions on using optional proxy signaling for a UNI logical port From the Add Logical Por...

Страница 119: ... support see Using ILMI on page 2 5 Note If you are using line loopback diagnostics you must disable ILMI support See the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 500 and B STDX 9000 for more information VPI Id 0 15 VCI Id 0 1023 Enter the ID of the virtual path VPI or virtual channel VCI you want to use for ILMI polling The default values are 0 for VPI 16 for VCI 0 for VPI direct l...

Страница 120: ...ially or fully match a configured node prefix Port Prefix Accepts only network prefixes that partially or fully match a configured port prefix Node or Port Prefix Accepts only network prefixes that partially or fully match either a configured node prefix or a configured port prefix Reject All Rejects all network prefixes received from an external network For more information about node and port pr...

Страница 121: ... and B STDX 9000 1 19 053 37 CES Attributes This section describes how to modify the CE parameters for an ATM CE logical port For more information on CE see ATM CE on page 2 10 From the Add Logical Port dialog box select the CES Parameters tab Figure 3 12 and complete the fields as described in Table 3 6 Figure 3 12 Add Logical Port CES Parameters Tab ...

Страница 122: ... integration period in milliseconds The default value is 2500 Insert Cell Type Select the cell type to be inserted when there is cell loss The options are FF default The value of the cells inserted is the hexadecimal FF Previous Cell The value of the cells inserted are from the previous cell User Defined The value of the cells inserted is defined by the user If the user selects this option the val...

Страница 123: ... data and or signalling is always conditioned in the receive direction egress or local port This mode provides a means for always overwriting the data and or signalling information The pull down menu options are None default when no testing is being done Data and Signalling Signalling For more information on Trunk Conditioning including range of values and defaults see Appendix I About Trunk Condi...

Страница 124: ...mber of cells lost exceeds this value the AAL1 chip goes into an under run condition Insert Cell Field 0 11 Enter the value for the inserted cells when User Defined is selected as the Insert Cell Type The range is zero 0 to 255 Partial Cell Value 1 47 Enables partial cell fill and specifies the minimum partial cell size It can be used to minimize the amount of delay required to assemble a cell Not...

Страница 125: ... port types The fields in this tab enable you to modify the traffic characteristics for the configurable control channel These traffic descriptors TDs are used for bandwidth allocation not for policing From the Add Logical Port dialog box select the Traffic Descriptors tab Figure 3 13and complete the steps that follow Figure 3 13 Traffic Descriptors Tab 1 To enter the Node to Node Forward traffic ...

Страница 126: ...e to Node Forward Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box 2 Select a traffic descriptor from the list for forward node to node traffic See Chapter 12 Configuring ATM Traffic Descriptors for more information on the TDs in this dialog box Choose OK to return to the Add Logical Port dialog box 3 Choose Select for Node to Node Reverse The Node to Node Reverse Traffic Descriptor dialog box appears Figure 3 15 ...

Страница 127: ...gure 3 15 Node to Node Reverse Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box 4 Select a traffic descriptor from the list for reverse node to node traffic and choose OK to return to the Add Logical Port dialog box 5 Choose Select for Trunk Signaling Forward The Trunk Signaling Forward Traffic Descriptor dialog box appears Figure 3 16 Figure 3 16 Trunk Signaling Forward Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box ...

Страница 128: ...tor dialog box appears Figure 3 17 Figure 3 17 Trunk Signaling Reverse Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box 8 Select a traffic descriptor from the list for reverse Trunk Signaling traffic and choose OK to return to the Add Logical Port dialog box To complete this trunk logical port configuration do one of the following If this is an OPTimum Trunk logical port continue with the next section OPTimum Trunk ...

Страница 129: ...e Add Logical Port dialog box select the VPI Range tab Figure 3 18 and complete the fields as described in Table 3 7 Figure 3 18 Add Logical Port VPI Range Tab Note Several of the OPTimum Trunk VPI Range attributes in Table 3 7 relate to the values you specify for transit Multipoint to Point Tunnel label switch path MPT LSP connections and transit point to point label switch path point to point LS...

Страница 130: ...um cell trunk logical port endpoints on CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 switches only Specify the first VPC VPI value in the range of VPI values for virtual UNI logical ports that use the OPTimum trunk For example if the desired range is 155 to 255 you would specify 155 in this field The default is zero 0 The range that you specify Must not overlap the ranges that you specify for transit MPT LSPs and ...

Страница 131: ...al UNI logical ports Must not conflict with the Opt Trunk VPI value Transit MPT LSP VPI Start OPTimum cell trunk logical port endpoints on CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 switches only Specify the first VPI value in the range of VPI values for transit MPT LSPs The default is zero 0 The range that you specify Must not overlap the ranges that you specify for virtual UNI logical ports and transit point t...

Страница 132: ...he ranges that you specify for virtual UNI logical ports and transit MPT LSPs Must not conflict with the Opt Trunk VPI value and the MPT LSP VPI value Transit Pt Pt LSP VPI Stop Specify the last VPI value in the range of VPI values for transit point to point LSP connections If you enter zero 0 the transit point to point LSP connection is disabled The range that you specify Must not overlap the ran...

Страница 133: ... and frequently asked questions for the ATM FCP see the following chapters in this guide Chapter 5 About the ATM FCP describes the operation of the ATM FCP Chapter 6 Working with the ATM FCP provides detailed configuration procedures and answers to frequently asked questions about using the ATM FCP Appendix D ATM FCP Rate Profile Tables describes the organization and default values for the ATM FCP...

Страница 134: ...on a CBX 500 switch FCP and VP Shaping must also be enabled on the card The number of VPI Shaping Rate fields on the Tunnel VP Shaping Rate tab is determined by the settings in the VPI Range tab In Figure 3 19 a range of 1 15 was specified in the VPI Range tab Figure 3 19 Add Logical Port Tunnel VP Shaping Rate Tab For each Tunnel VPI Shaping Rate field in this tab enter the shaping rate for the V...

Страница 135: ... that you set the logical port QoS fixed and dynamic options before you provision circuits Under certain conditions if you change the bandwidth from dynamic to fixed after you provision circuits one or more QoS classes including CBR may display negative bandwidth For more information about QoS see About QoS on page 12 3 Table 3 8 lists the default QoS parameters The switch routes circuits dependin...

Страница 136: ...e QoS tab contains fields that enable you to set the QoS parameters From the Add Logical Port dialog box select the QoS tab Figure 3 20 and complete the fields as described in Table 3 9 Figure 3 20 Add Logical Port QoS Tab Note For each class CBR CFR VBR VFR RT VBR VFR NRT ABR UBR the four fields in the table can be modified by clicking in the cell in the QOS table ...

Страница 137: ...te bandwidth If you set the CBR or VBR service class bandwidth to Fixed you are specifying the maximum bandwidth to reserve for this type of traffic if the network requests a circuit that exceeds the fixed value the circuit cannot be created If you set the ABR UBR service class to Fixed you are guaranteeing that amount of service at a minimum for the UBR queue provided that the VBR queues are not ...

Страница 138: ...rtest path or the path with the least number of hops The CDV route is determined from CDV values that are known for the direct and OPTimum trunks Admin Cost default A circuit originating from a queue with the Admin Cost routing metric looks for the lowest cost route to its destination this is not necessarily the shortest path or the path with the least number of hops The switch determines this rou...

Страница 139: ...Master CAC algorithm ensures that the switch packs circuits on a port without experiencing data loss or losing QoS UBR circuits do not use the CAC algorithm After monitoring your network if users of a particular service class are reserving more bandwidth than they are actually using you can adjust the oversubscription values to suit your needs By doing so however you may adversely impact the QoS f...

Страница 140: ... 40 You can limit the VBR NRT bandwidth further by entering a value in the QoS tab s SVC Allowed field on the Add Logical Port dialog box If you accept the default SVC allowed percentage of 100 for all QoS classes then SVCs will have the same access as PVCs to the logical port bandwidth in each QoS class If you want to limit the amount of logical port bandwidth that SVCs consume you must enter a v...

Страница 141: ...cal Port for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 2 From the Add Logical Port dialog box select a tab from Table 3 10 to review additional options 3 Choose OK to close the Add Logical Port dialog box and save the logical port settings or choose Close to close dialog box without saving changes Table 3 10 Add Logical Port PNNI and NTM Tabs Tab Action Description PNNI Enables you to configure PNNI attributes See...

Страница 142: ...al Port dialog box Figure 3 5 on page 3 8 appears 3 Select the LPort Type either ATM UNI DCE ATM UNI DTE or ATM NNI 4 Continue with the instructions beginning with General Attributes on page 3 16 to configure attributes for this virtual UNI NNI logical port Note The maximum number of virtual UNI logical ports per physical port can be verified by using the show pram card command at the switch conso...

Страница 143: ...and B STDX 9000 1 19 053 59 Configuring Logical Ports for Use With ATM SVCs If you plan to use SVCs in your network you must perform additional configuration You configure these SVC attributes for ATM UNI DCE ATM UNI DTE and ATM NNI logical port types For more information about SVCs see the following chapters Chapter 16 About SVCs Chapter 17 Configuring SVC Parameters ...

Страница 144: ...Beta Draft Confidential 3 601 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring CBX or GX Logical Ports Configuring Logical Ports for Use With ATM SVCs ...

Страница 145: ...orming ATM cell switching Keep in mind that the dialog boxes that appear while you configure logical ports display different attributes depending on the type of frame or cell based module being configured The CBX 500 frame based modules are also capable of providing frame based ATM switching ATM logical ports for these modules are configured the same as a B STDX 9000 frame based module For informa...

Страница 146: ...e logical port ATM Direct Trunk Direct Cell Trunk An ATM direct cell trunk direct trunk logical port type supports the transmission of virtual path connection VPC data Like OPTimum cell trunks direct trunks have no Lucent header A unique VPI VCI identifies the circuit and controls traffic using a separate channel A cell trunk uses a virtual path through the ATM cloud as a channel When configuring ...

Страница 147: ...s Cell based traffic is restricted to routes that traverse direct cell trunks OPTimum cell trunks have no Lucent trunk header A unique VPI VCI identifies the circuit and controls traffic using a separate channel A cell trunk uses a virtual path through the ATM cloud as a trunk You can configure an ATM OPTimum cell trunk to create a switch to switch Lucent trunk through a public data network PDN in...

Страница 148: ...ow cost public carrier services as the trunk between two Lucent switches rather than use a more expensive leased line service You use this logical port type to Optimize performance and throughput in situations where both ends are connected by Lucent switches Enable the logical port to communicate with a Lucent switch peer over an ATM PVC Multiplex multiple Frame Relay PVCs and SMDS connections ove...

Страница 149: ... the attached devices are outside the default range of VPI 0 15 and VCI 32 255 If you use this logical port as a feeder for OPTimum trunks the VPI value limits the number of OPTimum trunks you can create on this physical port The VCI value limits the number of circuits you can route over each OPTimum trunk This OPTimum trunk circuit trade off is shown by the following formulas where P represents t...

Страница 150: ...c STM 1 support VP Shaping For ATM Direct and OPTimum Cell Trunk logical ports you can only configure shaper attributes when VP shaping is selected Once you select Shaping Type VP the pull down list is enabled For ATM OPTimum Frame Trunk logical ports you can select both VP and VC shaping attributes from the pull down list Keep in mind that you must first configure the 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 or 1 po...

Страница 151: ...niversal I O 4 port Unchannelized T1 4 port Unchannelized E1 2 port HSSI 10 port DSX 1 ATM UNI DCE ATM UNI DTE OPTimum frame trunk ATM FR NNI 4 port 24 Channel T1 4 port 30 Channel E1 ATM UNI DCE ATM UNI DTE ATM based IOMs ATM DS3 E3 UNI 12 port ATM T1 12 port ATM E1 ATM UNI DTE ATM UNI DCE Direct trunk OPTimum cell trunk OPTimum frame trunk ATM FR NNI Note Because the ATM DS3 E3 UNI 12 port ATM T...

Страница 152: ...a frame based protocol that is designed to map easily to Frame Relay Lucent supports ATM DXI FUNI Mode 1A features for the ATM DXI FUNI standard These features include Provisioning for up to 938 virtual connections per card Support for AAL Type 5 data packaging only Frame sizes up to 8192 octets DTE DSU 16 bit frame checking sequence between the DTE and the DCE IOMs for ATM Interworking Services Y...

Страница 153: ...e threshold values you can configure for each frame based and ATM based module that supports ATM services Table 4 3 shows the maximum multi class service threshold values you can configure for each frame based and ATM based module that supports ATM services Table 4 2 Maximum Mono Class Service Thresholds per Card Type Card Type 56 Byte Buffers Bytes 8 Port UIO 5450 305200 10 Port DSX 4668 261408 4...

Страница 154: ...uring ATM Logical Ports on Frame based Modules Logical Port Congestion Thresholds 4 Port Unchannelized E1 1600 89600 12 Port Unchannelized E1 2069 115864 2 Port HSSI 22400 1254400 1 Port ATM UNI 54504 3052224 Table 4 3 Maximum Multi Class Service Thresholds per Card Type Continued Card Type 56 Byte Buffers Bytes ...

Страница 155: ...port the Add Logical Port dialog box contains several tabs containing a variety of parameters that you must specify Table 4 4 describes the options you can configure for each ATM logical port type Keep in mind that some options are only available for certain card types and the attributes available on any tab may vary depending on the type of service and card type Table 4 4 Add Logical Port Tabs Ta...

Страница 156: ...7 Congestion Control Sets the threshold parameters mild severe and absolute and closed loop congestion controls that determine how the switch responds to congestion in the network UNI DCE DTE Interworking for FR NNI Frame based cards see Table 4 1 on page 4 7 Link Management Sets the DCE and DTE polling timer and interval values Interworking for FR NNI All Priority Frame Specifies the service clas...

Страница 157: ... Sets the bandwidth allocation for the available QOS classes All All Discard Congestion Mapping Provides support for configurable mapping of discard eligible cell loss priority DE CLP and forward explicit congestion notification FECN explicit forward congestion indication EFCI bits for both ingress and egress traffic Direct trunk OPTimum cell trunk OPTimum frame trunk Interworking for FR NNI ATM C...

Страница 158: ... down list The available options in the LPort Type field differ depending on the supported ATM logical port types for your module Possible options include ATM UNI DCE ATM UNI DTE ATM Direct Line Trunk ATM OPTimum Cell Trunk ATM Direct Frame Trunk ATM Network Interworking for FR NNI See Table 4 5 to continue this configuration Table 4 5 Configuring ATM Logical Port Types Logical Port Type See ATM U...

Страница 159: ...Defining ATM UNI DCE DTE Logical Ports To define an ATM UNI DCE or ATM UNI DTE logical port 1 From the Add Logical Port dialog box select the General tab Figure 4 1 and complete the fields as described in Table 4 6 Figure 4 1 Add Logical Port General Tab Note If an element in the table does not appear or is grayed out on the tab that element is not applicable to the module or service you are confi...

Страница 160: ...runk the LPort ID is automatically assigned For ATM OPTimum Frame Trunk and ATM Network Interworking for FR NNI specify the VPI and VCI VPI Enter a number from zero 0 nnnn to identify the VP for the ATM logical port This is the VPI used for all circuits routed over this ATM OPTimum frame trunk Entering a value of zero 0 enables 4096 circuits to be routed over the trunk The range of valid VPI value...

Страница 161: ...hanging the value for this attribute does not admin down the logical port Resource Partitioning Network Overflow Set the Net Overflow parameters to one of two modes Public default Enables the circuit to use public trunks during traffic overflow or trunk failure conditions Restricted Restricts trunks to their own VPN See Configuring a Logical Port for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 for more information N...

Страница 162: ... tab Figure 4 5 and complete the fields as described in Table 4 7 Figure 4 2 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab Template Optional Check this box to save these settings as a template to use again to quickly configure a logical port with the same options Clear the box default if you do not wish to save the settings as a template See Using Templates on page 2 23 for more information Table 4 6 Add Lo...

Страница 163: ...nt of bandwidth on this logical port to ensure sufficient remaining bandwidth For example Physical port clock speed 1536 Kbps Logical port UNI DTE NNI Feeder Bandwidth 56 Kbps Logical port Frame Relay Trunk Bandwidth 1480 Kbps The example configuration allocates a public data network PDN trunk with 1480 Kbps bandwidth between two Lucent switches each attached to a PDN Shaping Type Select either VC...

Страница 164: ...ts at the opposite end of the connection If you believe that the path through the network providing the OPTimum trunk connectivity will introduce additional CDV above the value provided by the Lucent default enter the appropriate value in this field CRC Checking HSSI modules only Set this value to match the number of error checking bits used by the CPE connected to this port Performs a cyclic redu...

Страница 165: ...Logical Ports ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 054 21 ATM Attributes To set ATM attributes select the ATM tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 4 3 and complete the fields as described in Table 4 9 on page 4 22 Figure 4 3 Add Logical Port ATM Tab ...

Страница 166: ... connects to a router or host UNI DCE ports only Network Network Port connects to another switch or an end system The defaults are DCE for Network to Endsystem DTE NNI for Network to Network Valid Bits VPI 0 6 Enter a value that is within the valid range for either the NNI or UNI call header format For virtual logical ports this field is read only This field applies to VCCs only Specify the number...

Страница 167: ... valid range for the VCI field is 6 12 For more information about setting these values see page 4 5 For ATM Network Interworking for FR NNI logical ports enter the VCI of the ATM VCC used to carry the NNI data NNI is a single ATM circuit that can be used to carry a single Frame Relay circuit or many Frame Relay circuits multiplexed over a single ATM circuit Protocol Select the ATM protocol Options...

Страница 168: ...port User UPC Function Enables or disables the usage parameter control UPC function for PVCs and SVCs You can also enable or disable the UPC function for individual PVCs If you want to use the UPC function on a per PVC basis you must enable the UPC function on the logical port Enabled default Enables the UPC function for circuits on this logical port for all QoS classes except ABR Cells that do no...

Страница 169: ...ault is disabled Enable policing to prevent an attached device from overloading the switch with data on the control circuit The switch polices the control circuit to pre defined default traffic characteristics see Chapter 12 The attached device typically needs to support per VC shaping on the control channels Note If the attached device is another Lucent switch do not enable policing since the CBX...

Страница 170: ...LMI OAM Tab Fields Field Action Description Enable Select the check box to reserve a percentage of bandwidth in the VBR NRT QoS class for ILMI Clear the check box default to disable ILMI and not have reserve bandwidth If the attached device cannot run ILMI leave ILMI disabled To receive ILMI VCC status traps from non Lucent ATM UNI 3 1 devices you must enable ILMI For information about ILMI suppor...

Страница 171: ...s configured on the node and or port when a DTE port receives network prefixes from an external network Select one of the following options Accept All default No screening occurs accepts all prefixes Node Prefix Accepts only network prefixes that partially or fully match a configured node prefix Port Prefix Accepts only network prefixes that partially or fully match a configured port prefix Node o...

Страница 172: ...n Control Attributes When configuring frame based cards select the Congestion Control tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 4 5 and complete the fields as described in Table 4 11 Figure 4 5 Add Logical Port Congestion Control Tab Note Do not exceed the maximum threshold value for each card type The absolute congestion threshold cannot be greater than the maximum value allowed for each logi...

Страница 173: ...rmation on bit stuffing and bandwidth allocation For Channelized T1 E1 cards if n DS0s are assigned per logical port the maximum value allowed on the number of buffers is n x 225 T1 and n x 174 E1 CLLM Enable Threshold None 1 100 Threshold Mild 1 100 Interval sec 5 30 Consolidated Link Layer Management CLLM is a type of congestion control that reserves one DLCI address for transmitting congestion ...

Страница 174: ...te If you select simple as the rate enforcement scheme this feature is disabled Clear Delay congestion state clear delay Enter a value that determines the number of seconds in which the switch monitors the trunk s congestion on the port The default value is 3 seconds Call Admission Control Select this check box to reserve a percentage of bandwidth in the VBR NRT QoS class for ILMI Clear the check ...

Страница 175: ...DTE Logical Ports ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 054 31 Trap Control Attributes Select the Trap Control tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 4 6 and complete the fields as described in Table 4 12 Figure 4 6 Add Logical Port Trap Control Tab ...

Страница 176: ...e congestion threshold If you enter zero 0 no traps are generated for this logical port Low Generates a trap at the first sign of congestion High Only generates traps for serious network congestion Note Changing the value for this attribute does not admin down the logical port Frame Err min Threshold ATM Direct Line Trunk and ATM Network Interworking for FR NNI only Enter a value from zero 0 to 16...

Страница 177: ...es traps for PDU violations SMDS PDU Violation Threshold 0 255 OPTimum Frame Trunks only Specify the number of PDU violations that can occur before a trap is sent to the NMS The software increments a counter every time an SMDS PDU violation takes place on a logical port The software polls these counters every 60 seconds If a particular counter exceeds the specified SMDS PDU violation threshold for...

Страница 178: ...ss default PVC traffic maps to a VFR NRT service class Multi Class Allows PVC traffic to utilize all ATM services classes You must also specify Transmit Scheduling Mode VFR RT Negative Trunk logical port types only This checkbox becomes available if you select the Multi Class service class Select the check box to enable this field If enabled the trunk can be oversubscribed This option is useful in...

Страница 179: ...it Scheduling Mode The transmit scheduling mode determines the method used to schedule transmission among the service classes If you select the Multi Class LPort service class select one of the following queue management options Fixed Priority Empties the CFR queue first and then the VFR RT VFR NRT and UFR queues in fixed order Weighted Round Robin Empties the CFR queue first VFR RT and VFR NRT qu...

Страница 180: ...types are only available for the 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 and ATM UNI DS3 E3 cards ATM Direct Trunks To configure an ATM direct trunk perform the following steps Step 1 Configure the physical port you want to use for the direct trunk see the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 You can configure direct trunks on any of the following A...

Страница 181: ...E3 UNI module select a traffic shaper ID by clicking on Select Figure 4 8 on page 4 38 displays the Select Traffic Shaper dialog box Choose a value from 1 through 16 to specify the Shaper ID This list provides both VP and VC shaping attributes Make sure you assign only one trunk logical port per shaper ID Assigning more than one trunk logical port to a given shaper ID decreases circuit performance...

Страница 182: ...ient resources but fewer resources than would be allocated based on PCR for guaranteeing that network performance objectives are met This parameter applies only to VBR traffic it does not apply to CBR or UBR traffic Pcr cps The PCR ranges between zero 0 and 7 This value represents the maximum allowed cell transmission rate expressed in cps It defines the shortest time period between cells and prov...

Страница 183: ...s continue with the section Completing the Logical Port Configuration on page 4 52 Table 4 15 Configuring Direct Cell Trunk OPTimum Cell Trunk Attributes For 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 or 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 cards see For ATM DS3 E3 UNI cards see Discard Congestion Mapping Attributes on page 4 47 Trap Control Attributes on page 4 31 OPTimum Trunk VPI Range Attributes on page 4 50 Priority Frame A...

Страница 184: ...lect Traffic Shaper dialog box Choose a value from 1 through 16 to specify the Shaper ID This list provides both VP and VC shaping attributes Make sure you assign only one trunk logical port per shaper ID Assigning more than one trunk logical port to a given shaper ID decreases circuit performance Table 4 14 on page 4 38 describes the fields in the Select Traffic Shaper dialog box For more informa...

Страница 185: ... 19 054 41 When you finish setting these attributes continue with the section Completing the Logical Port Configuration on page 4 52 Table 4 16 Configuring OPTimum Frame Trunk Attributes For 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 or 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 cards see For frame based cards see Discard Congestion Mapping Attributes on page 4 47 Trap Control Attributes on page 4 31 Priority Frame Attributes on page ...

Страница 186: ...hanumeric name for this logical port Service Type ATM is selected by default LPort Type Select ATM Network Interworking for FR NNI 2 Complete the fields in the remaining tabs as described in Table 4 17 When you finish setting these attributes continue with the section Completing the Logical Port Configuration on page 4 52 Table 4 17 Configuring Network Interworking for Frame Relay NNI Attributes F...

Страница 187: ...cription Protocol Select the link management protocol used by the Frame Relay equipment connected to this port Options include ANSI T1 617 Annex D default The network uses DLCI 0 for link management LMI Rev1 The network uses DLCI 1023 for link management CCITT Q 933 Annex A For international standard European use only The network uses DLCI 0 for link management Auto Detect Use this option only if ...

Страница 188: ...used with the DCE Events Count N393 parameter The local management protocol monitors the number of events you specify for the DCE event count If the number of events found in error exceeds the DCE Error Threshold you specify the link is declared inactive The default value is 3 DCE Event Count 1 10 Specify the DCE Event Count This field specifies the number of events in a sliding window of events m...

Страница 189: ...hover to the backup port occurs If you enable RLMI on a Frame Relay UNI DTE or NNI port you can configure the RLMI Max Full Status Attempts If you enable RLMI you cannot set LMI to Disabled Notes You cannot disable RLMI or delete a logical port if the logical port is configured in an RLMI service name binding If the LPort is configured as a member of a Master RLMI service name binding you can chan...

Страница 190: ...lay This delay minimizes network downtime visibility to end users Note Changing the value for this attribute does not admin down the logical port DTE Poll Interval sec 5 30 Specify the number of seconds between the transmission of status inquiry messages T391 Set the DTE poll interval to a value that is less than the DCE poll verify timer on the attached device This value must be greater than 1 2 ...

Страница 191: ...apping takes place after the ATM interface receives the data These options provide support for configurable mapping of the DE CLP and FECN EFCI bits Select the Discard Congestion Mapping tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 4 10 and complete the fields as described in Table 4 19 Figure 4 10 Add Logical Port Discard Congestion Mapping Tab DTE Full Status Poll Frequency 1 255 Specify the nu...

Страница 192: ...in down the logical port Discard Priority Ingress Select one of the following options Mapped to DE default The value of the CLP bit received in the cells that make up the ingress frame is transferred directly to the internal Discard Priority bit The Discard Priority bit is transferred with the frame to the egress card for subsequent transmission If the egress packet format is Frame Relay then the ...

Страница 193: ...lue of this attribute does not admin down the logical port Congestion Ingress Select one of the following options Mapped to FECN default The value of the EFCI bit received in the cells that comprise the ingress frame is transferred directly to the FECN bit The congestion bit is transferred with the frame to the egress card for subsequent transmission If the egress packet format is Frame Relay then...

Страница 194: ...lete the field described in Table 4 20 Figure 4 11 Add Logical Port VPI Range Tab Table 4 20 Add Logical Port VPI Range Tab Fields Field Action Description Opt Trunk VPI Enter a number from zero 0 nnnn to identify the virtual path for the ATM logical port This is the VPI used for all circuits routed over this OPTimum trunk Entering a value of zero 0 enables 4096 circuits to be routed over the trun...

Страница 195: ...ions It must also not conflict with the values specified in the Opt Trunk VPI and MPT LSP VPI fields Transit MPT LSP VPI Stop Specify the last VPI value in the range of VPI values for transit MPT LSPs The default is zero 0 The range that you specify must not overlap the ranges that you specify for virtual UNI logical ports and transit point to point LSP connections It must also not conflict with t...

Страница 196: ...rt for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 2 Optional If this is an ATM UNI ATM OPTimum cell trunk or ATM direct cell trunk logical port type on a 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 or 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 card you can configure QoS parameters From the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 4 12 select the QoS tab Figure 4 12 Add Logical Port QoS Tab See Setting QoS Parameters on page 3 51 for more information 3 Choose ...

Страница 197: ...ll trunk logical port or an ATM OPTimum frame trunk logical port You can configure a trunk between two logical port endpoints for a trunk See Chapter 7 Configuring Trunks for more information You can add PVCs between logical port endpoints of an ATM UNI logical port connection See Chapter 10 Configuring ATM PVCs for more information You can configure logical ports on another physical port Select t...

Страница 198: ...Beta Draft Confidential 4 54 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM Logical Ports on Frame based Modules Completing the Logical Port Configuration ...

Страница 199: ...l circuit VC cell packet queuing and discarding mechanisms for additional network congestion control Based on the ATM Forum s Traffic Management Specification Version 4 0 the ATM FCP delivers a fair deterministic service for bursty ATM traffic including Dynamically adjusting the allowed cell rate ACR in response to resource management RM cell feedback Reducing congestion in the network by adjustin...

Страница 200: ... OC 3c STM 1 8 Port DS3 and E3 ATM UNI modules 8 Port ATM DS3 4 Port ATM UNI OC 3c STM 1 module 1 Port STM1 E1 IMA Enhanced 1 Port OC 12c STM 4 module 3 Port Channelized ATM IMA Enhanced 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 IMA module 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 IMA module Note Contact a qualified Lucent organization for network design validation before enabling the FCP Note FCP is not supported on the 16 Por...

Страница 201: ...DF and RIF can be configured in proportion to the MCR Refer to About ACR on page 5 14 for more information about configuring the RDF and RIF MCR guarantee The MCR guarantee varies by Quality of Service QoS class as follows Unspecified Bit Rate UBR Class The MCR is set at a rate of 100 cps Note that UBR is a best effort service and cannot be guaranteed Available Bit Rate ABR Class The MCR is set du...

Страница 202: ... CBX 500 Queues and the ATM FCP Cells from the CBX 500 switching fabric are transmitted through the ATM FCP to the IOM output buffer Note that the ATM FCP only manages non real time traffic In the FCP cells are queued and dequeued based on the configured rate for the VC Each VC is subject to discard mechanisms Cells entering the output CBX 500 quad plane queues are transmitted in the same manner a...

Страница 203: ...cating that it is a CCRM cell The default value for the CCRM ID is always set at a value of 6 and cannot be modified Refer to Enabling the FCP on page 6 2 for more information about CCRM cells Backward Congestion Message BCM Cells Provide a different RM cell mechanism and may also provide interoperability with non Lucent ATM switches The Protocol ID field in each BCM cell is defined as the BCM ID ...

Страница 204: ...conflict with Lucent s implementation of this standard Other vendors can set the Protocol ID to any number between 1 255 RM cells are terminated by Lucent switches under the following conditions If the RM cell received is a backward RM cell has a Protocol ID of 5 and is transversing a Virtual Circuit VC then it is designated as a BCM cell and may be terminated If the RM cell received is a backward...

Страница 205: ...trol loops are outer loops The switches do not change their cell rates in response to this flow control loop Rather they mark the congestion indication CI and no increase NI bits based on the local congestion state as defined in the ATM Forum s Traffic Management Specification Version 4 0 Switch 2 does not generate or terminate flow control loops to the other switches Switch 2 generates a forward ...

Страница 206: ...5 3 shows an example of CCRM closed loop flow control between two CBX 500 switches Figure 5 3 CCRM Closed loop Flow Control On Switch B the FCP in IOM 2 generates RM cells to control the rate of data transmitted by IOM 2 on Switch A IOM 2 on Switch B also determines the type of RM cell to generate by looking at the logical port setting on IOM 1 on Switch B ATM FCP CBX 500 SWITCH A ATM FCP CBX 500 ...

Страница 207: ...crease The source ATM switch then responds by adjusting the cell rate accordingly for that VC and terminates the CCRM cell CCRM Cell Termination When you configure the FCP to terminate CCRM cells the FCP decides whether or not to increase or decrease the ACR This decision is based upon one or more of the following The local port congestion state The current ACR being above the fair bandwidth for t...

Страница 208: ...ure 5 4 shows an example of BCM closed loop flow control between two CBX 500 switches Figure 5 4 BCM Closed loop Flow Control On Switch B the FCP in IOM 2 generates RM cells to control the rate of data transmitted by IOM 2 on Switch A IOM 2 on Switch B also determines the type of RM cell to generate by looking at the logical port setting on IOM 1 on Switch B ATM FCP CBX 500 SWITCH A ATM FCP CBX 50...

Страница 209: ...ive any BCM cells from the customer premise equipment CPE the ACR of the VCs keeps increasing until the logical port becomes congested The ACR will increase fairly corresponding to the RIF and peak cell rate PCR values of the VCs See Table 6 2 on page 6 11 for information on setting the RM Cell Termination attribute BCM Cell Generation You can configure any port on an IOM to generate BCM cells If ...

Страница 210: ...ation of the total bandwidth for managed non real time circuits based on the MCR of the VC relative to all of the managed VCs The total non real time bandwidth is the total port bandwidth less the bandwidth allocated to unmanaged real time circuits and point to point Non Real Time NRT circuits Note that the FCP can increase the ACR well beyond its fair bandwidth Once other circuits attempt to use ...

Страница 211: ...e Adjustment The ATM FCP performs cell rate adjustments on each circuit that it manages by distributing the available bandwidth fairly among the managed circuits A circuit is initially granted an ICR its rate is then adjusted continuously The rate at any given time is referred to as the ACR ICR and ICR Constant When a VC initially becomes active its ACR is set to its ICR The ICR for a VC is determ...

Страница 212: ...for information about configuring the Idle VC Factor and RM cell generation interval About ACR The FCP continuously adjusts the ACR of the circuits The VC cell rate is increased according to the following formula ACR ACR RIF x PCR Where 1 32768 RIF 1 The ACR is upper bounded by the PCR The VC cell rate is decreased according to the following formula ACR ACR RDF x ACR Where 1 32768 RDF 1 The ACR is...

Страница 213: ...formation about MCR classes For information on downloading the tables using Navis EMS CBGX see Downloading Buffer Threshold and Rate Profile Tables on page 6 8 The RIE and RDE are defined as follows Rate Increase Exponent RIE The RIE is a configurable value that is the negative exponent for the RIF calculation RIF 2 RIE For example an RIE of 3 translates to an RIF of 1 8 The RIE must be less than ...

Страница 214: ... VC queueing Per VC queuing provides independent buffer allocation to each VC thereby isolating congestion on one VC from other VCs Each per VC queue has two configurable thresholds Local congestion threshold Local discard threshold The local congestion and discard thresholds for a specific VC are obtained by indexing the congestion and discard profile tables with the MCR class of the VC The MCR c...

Страница 215: ... the VCs on this port to continue to queue cells after the Global Discard threshold is exceeded Any VC that has also exceeded its Local Discard threshold would continue to queue either CLP0 cells if the circuit is using the CLP1 discard method or cells from the current packet if the circuit is using the EPD method Circuits can continue to queue cells until the Global CLP0 1 threshold is reached Th...

Страница 216: ...ovisioned for UBR ABR and VBR NRT VCs If the current cell causes the queue for a VC to exceed the discard thresholds and the cell has CLP set to 1 then the cell is discarded Note that EPD is not performed in this case Partial Packet Discard PPD If the global CLP0 1 threshold for a port is reached PPD is performed for circuits that are configured for EPD However unlike EPD all of the remaining cell...

Страница 217: ...affic tunneling through a non Lucent network on a virtual path The core network enforces a VP traffic contract If traffic leaving the CBX 500 is not shaped to the contract this traffic is dropped by the usage parameter control UPC as it enters the core network Figure 5 7 shows an example of VP shaping network architecture Figure 5 7 VP Shaping Network Architecture Example m Note You must enable th...

Страница 218: ...in decreasing order of priority CBR VBR RT VBR NRT ABR UBR Each QoS class has two configurable thresholds a discard threshold and a CLP0 1 threshold The eight thresholds two per service class are configured on a per card basis See the section on configuring VP shaping attributes in the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for information about the default V...

Страница 219: ...This chapter describes the following topics and tasks Configuration Process Overview on page 6 2 outlines the major steps to configure ATM FCP Enabling the FCP on page 6 2 describes specific steps to enable ATM FCP Downloading Buffer Threshold and Rate Profile Tables on page 6 8 describes how to load rate profile tables into the FCP Setting Logical Port FCP Attributes on page 6 10 describes how to...

Страница 220: ... under the desired switch 4 Expand the desired card node 5 Perform one of the following Select Modify from the Actions menu Choose the Modify button from the toolbar Right click on the card instance node and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Card dialog box appears Figure 6 1 Step 1 Enable the ATM FCP See Enabling the FCP below Step 2 Download buffer threshold and rate profile tables S...

Страница 221: ...rd dialog box see the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Note You can also access the card via the Back Panel view see the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information Slots 1 and 2 in a CBX 500 switch are reserved for the main switch processor SP module and the optional redundant SP module Slot 1 is a...

Страница 222: ...ue is 1024 ICR Constant 0 15 Enter the initial cell rate ICR constant The default value is 8 For more information on the ICR constant parameter see ICR and ICR Constant on page 5 13 Manage VBRnrt Traffic Select whether variable bit rate non real time VBR NRT traffic is treated as available bit rate ABR traffic Enabled Select the check box to have VBR NRT traffic treated as ABR traffic and managed ...

Страница 223: ...c based on the Frame Relay parameters set for this circuit Enable Select the check box to enable traffic shaping for VBR RT traffic Disable default Clear the check box to stop traffic shaping for VBR RT traffic Note You must enable the Traffic Pace field VBR Nrt Shaping Select traffic shaping for VBR NRT traffic based on the Frame Relay parameters set for this circuit Enable Select the check box t...

Страница 224: ...s for the card Once the queue length reaches this threshold all cells are discarded until the queue length falls below this threshold This field is active only if the Enable ATM Flow Control Processor check box is selected If you modify this value you must then perform a PRAM Sync VBR Real Time EPD CLP1 Discard Enter the discard threshold for VBR RT queues for the card Once the queue length reache...

Страница 225: ... Enter the maximum length of ABR UBR queues for the card Once the queue length reaches this threshold all cells are discarded until the queue length falls below this threshold This field is active only if the Enable ATM Flow Control Processor check box is selected If you modify this value you must then perform a PRAM Sync ABR UBR EPD CLP1 Discard Enter the discard threshold for ABR UBR queues on t...

Страница 226: ...e 6 3 on page 6 9 are always the default files for this dialog box These defaults remain the same even after you select and load different files See Appendix D ATM FCP Rate Profile Tables for more information on the use and content of the profile tables To load the Buffer Threshold and Rate Profile tables 1 Expand the network for the switch on which you want to enable FCP 2 Expand the node for the...

Страница 227: ... appears Figure 6 3 Figure 6 3 Load Rate Profile Tables Dialog Box Note If the Enable ATM Flow Control Processor check box is not checked in the card attributes the Load Profile menu option will not be available Once this field is enabled the FCP attribute fields will be available on the Modify Card dialog box see Figure 6 1 on page 6 3 Access the Modify Card dialog box and enable ATM FCP using th...

Страница 228: ...Step 6 6 Choose Load The files are loaded into the Sybase database 7 Perform a PRAM Sync See the Navis EMS CBGX Getting Started Guide for PRAM Sync instructions Setting Logical Port FCP Attributes When you define logical ports on an FCP enabled module you must configure additional ATM FCP attributes for the logical port To set ATM FCP attributes for a logical port 1 Access the Add Modify Logical P...

Страница 229: ...ion Auto RM Generation Select the mode for Auto RM Generation Options include Allow default RM cell generation is automatically disabled for a VC if no upstream FCP enabled IOM is detected for the VC in the adjacent upstream switch Override The switch continues to generate RM cells regardless of whether or not an adjacent upstream switch contains an FCP enabled IOM Cell Generation Select the type ...

Страница 230: ...ed These switches mark the explicit forward congestion indication EFCI bit in data cells to indicate network congestion If this option is enabled the ATM FCP reviews the EFCI bits in the cell stream when it generates a backward RM cell EFCI Marking Check the box to enable the ATM FCP to mark forward data cells to indicate congestion on the egress path If you choose to enable this parameter the FCP...

Страница 231: ...t value is 128 for logical ports created on a IMA group with multiple IMA links configured See the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for details about viewing this and other ATM FCP attributes for ATM logical ports FCP BP Threshold VBR CBX 500 IMA and CBX 3500 Enhanced IMA modules only Enter the value of the back pressure BP threshold for VBR NRT traffic o...

Страница 232: ...rt Channelized STM 1 E1 ATM w IMA Enhanced module CBX 3500 If you experience difficulties that are not addressed in this section and require assistance please contact the Lucent TAC For contact information see Technical Support on page xlvii What happens if I disable the FCP The FCP is an optional feature that is available for the supported CBX 500 IOM listed above See Enabling the FCP on page 6 2...

Страница 233: ... Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM Configuration Options The FCP subsystem for the 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM was designed to support a variety of distinct T1 channels and or IMA groups IMA groups can bundle up to eight T1 channels to form a single entity The following logical port configuration options are available Default Configuration The FCP allocates a default amount of 1K cell buffer memory p...

Страница 234: ... CI bit setting from zero 0 to 1 for BCM cells Why are RM cells not generated even though I am using the Auto RM Generation option The VC Manager establishes all circuits During circuit setup the VC Manager looks at the adjacent upstream switch to find an FCP enabled IOM in the circuit path If the VC Manager detects an FCP enabled IOM the FCP determines whether or not to generate RM cells on that ...

Страница 235: ...S1 T1 channels on the 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM or the 63 E1 channels on the 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 IMA IOM By contrast FCP enabled IOM1 modules have a maximum of only eight channels or ports to poll The effects of the increased delay required to poll each of the 84 DS1 T1 channels on the 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM or the 63 E1 channels on the 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 IMA IOM ...

Страница 236: ... circuit connections A VC will enter into an EPD state only if both local and global buffering resources have been utilized The buffer space between the Global Discard and Global CLP0 1 thresholds allows the VCs on a port to continue to queue cells after the Global Discard threshold is exceeded Cells are queued according to the following principles If the VC has the EPD discard option enabled ever...

Страница 237: ...ive cost About LTP on page 7 3 describes how to configure keep alive KA control frames About APS on page 7 6 describes how to use the CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 optical cards to provide automated trunk backup in cases of equipment failure These cards include OC 3c STM 1 CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 OC 12c STM 4 CBX 500 and GX 550 OC 48 STM 16 GX 550 OC 48c STM 16c GX 550 About Trunk Backup for the...

Страница 238: ...h If the circuit finds more than one path with enough available virtual bandwidth the circuit chooses the path with the lowest administrative cost This assumes that administrative cost is the designated routing metric For the UNI or NNI logical port endpoint if you designate CDV or end to end delay as the routing metric the circuit chooses the trunk s with the lowest CDV or end to end delay The sw...

Страница 239: ...es used to measure trunk delay When Switch A sends a KA request to Switch B a time stamp is put into the KA request frame When Switch B receives the KA request it sends a KA reply to Switch A Switch A receives the KA reply and calculates the round trip delay from Switch A to Switch B Figure 7 1 Trunk Delay OSPF Metric and KA Messaging KA Threshold The KA Threshold field in the Add Trunk dialog box...

Страница 240: ...ead only field where the dynamic delay is measured continually on operational trunks Under most conditions the dynamic delay value will match the static delay value However if some characteristics of the underlying transmission media for the trunk changes such that the dynamic delay changes this value may differ from the static delay If you use the Modify Trunk dialog box to view attributes for a ...

Страница 241: ... 4 The Modify Trunk dialog box appears Figure 7 2 Figure 7 2 Modify Trunk Dialog Box 5 Edit the static delay value 6 Choose OK to accept the change If the trunk reinitializes for any reason the static delay value you entered when you modified the trunk is automatically replaced by the static delay value measured when the trunk reinitializes ...

Страница 242: ...vides line backup APS eliminates bandwidth reservation for the backup trunk APS Options Different APS options are available depending on the type of Lucent switch module and logical port in use These options include Intra card APS 1 1 APS with Trunk Backup APS Resilient UNI Fast Inter card APS 1 1 Each of these APS options comply with relevant industry standards and use the same criteria for switc...

Страница 243: ...NI Direct Trunk NNI PVC SVC Offnet PVC b GR 253 G 841 Sec 7 1 Bi directional Revertive and Non revertive Intra card Bi directional Revertive and Non revertive Inter card G 783 G 841 Annex B Bi directional Non revertive Intra card Bi directional Non revertive Inter card 1 Port OC 48c STM 16 ULC UNI Direct Trunk NNI PVC SVC Offnet PVCb GR 253 G 841 Sec 7 1 Bi directional Revertive and Non revertive ...

Страница 244: ...Direct Trunk NNI PVC SVC Offnet PVC b GR 253 G 841 Sec 7 1 Bi directional Revertive and Non revertive Intra cardf G 783 G 841 Annex B Bi directional Non revertive Intra card f a The 128 MB IOM1 is supported only b Transit SPVCs are also supported However SPVCs originating on the interface being switched are not supported c The maximum number of VCs supported on each physical interface is the maxim...

Страница 245: ...rt OC 3c STM 1 ULC 4 Port OC 12c STM 4 ULC 1 Port OC 48c STM 16 ULC UNIa Direct trunkb PVC GR 253 G 841 Sec 7 G 783 G 841 Annex B Bi directional Non revertive Inter card CBX 500 4 Port OC 3c STM 1 IOM UNIa Direct trunkb PVC GR 253 G 841 Sec 7 G 783 G 841 Annex B Bi directional Non revertive Inter card 1 Port OC 12c STM 4 IOM UNIa Direct trunkb PVC GR 253 G 841 Sec 7 G 783 G 841 Annex B Bi directio...

Страница 246: ...to static allocation for each port on the Universal IOP Universal IOP The CBX 3500 ATM Universal IOP supports both inter card and intra card APS while the POS Universal IOP supports only intra card APS See the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for a listing of the minimum software and hardware versions that support the various APS options The following s...

Страница 247: ...on can be used in conjunction with Lucent ATM direct cell trunk logical ports When configuring APS Trunk Backup you have to provision a separate logical port and a separate trunk on each working and protection port For more information see Configuring APS Trunk Backup and Fast APS 1 1 for ATM Direct Trunks on page 7 29 Only one trunk is active at any given moment If the primary trunk fails times o...

Страница 248: ...ent UNI on a CBX 3500 CBX 500 Configure the working and protection port on different IOMs See the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information APS Resilient UNI on a GX 550 Configure the working and protection port on either the same module BIO or Phy or a different module BIO or Phy See the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 50...

Страница 249: ...e information Configure an APS trunk between ports on different IOMs in a CBX 500 switch Fast APS 1 1 on a GX 550 Configure the working and protection physical ports on different modules See the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information Configure an APS ATM direct cell trunk between ports on different modules in a GX 550 switch Physical Port...

Страница 250: ...nks are automatically activated when you create an ATM NNI logical Port and configure PNNI parameters at either end of the link connection You do not need to manually select connection endpoints When the working link is activated the protection endpoints are automatically configured with the appropriate values See Configuring Fast APS 1 1 for PNNI Links on page 7 36 for more information Note See C...

Страница 251: ...nk The switch allows you to define up to eight backup trunks for a single primary trunk Once you configure the primary and backup trunk s you configure the primary trunk to automatically back up upon failure If a trunk line requires maintenance you can manually initiate and terminate a trunk backup Configuring B STDX 9000 Trunk Backup To configure trunk backup on a B STDX 9000 switch 1 Access the ...

Страница 252: ...ailure threshold field see Figure 7 7 on page 7 21 2 The system resumes using the primary trunk after it is in service for the period of time specified in the Trunk Restoration Threshold field see Figure 7 7 on page 7 21 Activating or Terminating a Backup Trunk Manually You can override the values for automatic trunk backup by using the manual trunk backup feature To activate or terminate a backup...

Страница 253: ...nd the same bandwidth Defining a trunk is a two step sequence Step 1 Configure a trunk logical port type as follows For a CBX 500 or GX 550 see Defining a Logical Port on page 3 9 For a B STDX 9000 see one of the following sections Defining ATM Direct Trunk and OPTimum Cell Trunk Logical Ports on page 4 36 Defining ATM OPTimum Frame Trunk Logical Ports on page 4 40 Step 2 Define a trunk configurat...

Страница 254: ...isplayed 4 Right click on the Trunks node and select Add from the pop up menu as shown in Figure 7 4 Figure 7 4 Adding a Trunk Note Certain trunk attributes are defined as non disruptive Non disruptive attributes appear in italicized text in Navis EMS CBGX dialog boxes When you modify any of these attributes the NMS sends the appropriate SNMP SET commands to the switch without bringing down the tr...

Страница 255: ...vices Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 057 19 The Add Trunk dialog box Figure 7 5 appears Figure 7 5 Add Trunk Dialog Box 5 In the Endpoints field click on the Select button to choose two logical ports which will be the trunk endpoints ...

Страница 256: ...ndpoint 1 The types are as follows ATM Direct Trunk ATM OPTimum Cell Trunk 7 Review the Bandwidth field The bandwidth for each logical port endpoint must be the same 8 Choose OK The Add Trunk dialog box appears displaying the parameters for both logical ports in the trunk configuration Figure 7 7 Note When you configure an OPTimum trunk or virtual UNI between two endpoints the logical ports must m...

Страница 257: ...runks ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 057 21 Figure 7 7 Add Trunk Dialog Box with Defined LPort Parameters 9 Complete the fields in the Administrative tab in the Add Trunk dialog box as described in Table 7 3 ...

Страница 258: ...te a Backup trunk Note This parameter is not supported on trunks between CBX and B STDX switches Administrative Cost 1 65534 Enter a value from 1 65534 that defines the cost of using this trunk for a virtual circuit VC when a VC is being dynamically created on the switch The lower the administrative cost of the path the more likely OSPF will select it for circuit traffic The default administrative...

Страница 259: ...een two nodes and you configure this option for it then you effectively prevent SVC traffic from traversing this trunk Layer2 VPN Name Select a Layer2 Virtual Private Network VPN name The default is Public To select a different Layer2 VPN name clear the Default check box and choose the Select Layer2 VPN button For more information about Layer2 VPNs see Chapter 13 Configuring Layer 2 VPNs Defined B...

Страница 260: ...e highest priority for routing TOS Zero Metric End 2 Enter a value between 1 and 65535 This value specifies the ToS cost for Endpoint 2 of the trunk The lowest ToS zero metric has the highest priority for routing Static Delay in microsec Represents the measured one way delay in units of 100 microseconds This measurement is taken when the trunk initializes and it is only updated when the trunk stat...

Страница 261: ...0 switch platform s APS trunk backup options see Configuring APS Trunk Backup and Fast APS 1 1 for ATM Direct Trunks on page 7 29 For an overview of B STDX 9000 trunk backup see About Trunk Backup for the B STDX 9000 on page 7 15 Configuring the Primary Trunk for Trunk Backup 1 If you select Primary as the Trunk Type the Primary Options tab is displayed as shown in Figure 7 8 Figure 7 8 Add Trunk ...

Страница 262: ...he number of retries that the system performs during a retry cycle Enter a value for number of retries The default is 20 retries Retry Cycle Interval min 0 1092 Indicates the lapse of time between retry cycles Enter a value in minutes The default is 10 minutes Backup on Trunk Failure Select the check box default to enable automatic trunk backup for this trunk Clear the check box to disable this fe...

Страница 263: ...00 1 19 057 27 Configuring the Backup Trunk for APS Trunk Backup 1 If you select Backup as the trunk type the Backup Options tab is displayed as shown in Figure 7 9 Figure 7 9 Add Trunk Backup Options Tab 2 Select the Select Primary Trunk button to display a list of available trunks The Select Primary Trunk dialog box appears Figure 7 10 ...

Страница 264: ...00 Configuring Trunks Working With Trunks Figure 7 10 Select Primary Trunk Dialog Box 3 Select the name of the primary trunk For a B STDX 9000 you can configure up to eight different backup trunks for each primary trunk 4 Choose OK to return to the Add Trunk dialog box 5 Choose OK to complete the configuration ...

Страница 265: ...ns see APS Options on page 7 6 Configured two working ports which are on two different switches and their APS Trunk Backup Fast APS 1 1 attributes Configured two protection ports which are on the same switches as the working ports and their APS Trunk Backup Fast APS 1 1 attributes Defining ATM Direct Trunk Logical Ports The steps in this section describe how to configure direct trunk logical ports...

Страница 266: ...g Select Modify from the Actions menu Choose the Modify button from the toolbar Right click on the PPorts class node and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify PPort dialog box appears Figure 7 11 Figure 7 11 Modify PPort Dialog Box 6 Select the APS tab Figure 7 11 Note For detailed descriptions of the tabs and fields in this dialog box see the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500...

Страница 267: ...nter the physical port ID of the protection port APS Resilient UNI Enables you to use APS in conjunction with fault tolerant PVC functionality If you select this option enter the slot ID and physical port ID for the protection port and slot APS with Trunk Backup Enables you to use a trunk backup that is configured between the protection ports If you select this option enter the slot ID and physica...

Страница 268: ...n Setting Logical Port Attributes on page 3 14 to complete the fields in the tabs on the Add Logical Port dialog box 16 When you finish choose OK to save the logical port configuration for the working port 17 APS Trunk Backup only To configure an ATM Direct Trunk logical port for the protection port repeat step 1 through step 16 18 In the navigation panel select the switch on which the second work...

Страница 269: ... 3 Double click on the switch to which you want to add a trunk logical port The Switch tab is displayed 4 Right click on the Trunks node and select Add from the popup menu as shown in Figure 7 4 on page 7 18 The Add Trunk dialog box appears Figure 7 5 on page 7 19 5 In the Endpoints section click on the Select button to choose two logical ports which will be the trunk endpoints The Select Trunk En...

Страница 270: ...l ports which will be the trunk endpoints The Select Trunk Endpoints dialog box Figure 7 6 on page 7 20 appears 6 Select the name of the switch where the first protection port resides then select the name of the switch where the second protection port resides 7 For each switch endpoint select the ATM direct trunk logical port that resides on the protection port 8 Choose OK 9 Complete the fields in...

Страница 271: ...h you want to add the trunk The Switch tab is displayed 4 Right click on the Trunks node and select Add from the popup menu as shown in Figure 7 4 on page 7 18 The Add Trunk dialog box Figure 7 5 on page 7 19 appears 5 In the Endpoints field click on the Select button to choose two logical ports which will be the trunk endpoints The Select Trunk Endpoints dialog box Figure 7 6 on page 7 20 appears...

Страница 272: ...other device Configured one protection port on the GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch and one protection port on the other device Defining ATM NNI Logical Ports for PNNI Links The steps in this section describe how to configure ATM NNI logical ports on GX 550 switches defined as PNNI links for Fast APS 1 1 You must configure each working physical port on the GX 550 with an ATM NNI logical port includi...

Страница 273: ... 5 on page 3 8 5 In the LPort Type field select ATM NNI from the pull down menu 6 Use the instructions in Table 7 6 to set the logical port attributes Table 7 6 Configuring an ATM NNI Logical Port Use the instructions on To set the page 3 16 General tab attributes page 3 20 Administrative tab attributes page 3 27 ATM tab attributes to select the ATM Protocol PNNI 1 0 page 3 34 ILMI OAM tab attribu...

Страница 274: ...ategory The weights of all the network interfaces along a path are added up and switches choose the path with the lowest cumulative weight when making routing decisions For example suppose that VBR RT traffic has two available paths for reaching a given destination one path has a weight of 1000 and the other path has a weight of 4000 If the call requests VBR RT QoS and administrative weight as a m...

Страница 275: ... Available bit rate ABR Indicates the administrative weight to assign to the ABR QoS category for the network interface associated with the logical port Enter a value between one and 16 777 215 or accept the default value 5040 Unspecified bit rate UBR Indicates the administrative weight to assign to the UBR QoS category for the network interface associated with the logical port Enter a value betwe...

Страница 276: ...verse traffic descriptor for PNNI RCCs Reverse To configure the reverse traffic descriptor for PNNI RCCs select the button to the right of the field Then choose a traffic descriptor from the Select Traffic Descriptor dialog box The Override Default check box above the Reverse field must be checked Static Delay µSec 0 16777215 Static delay for PNNI links in a path is summed to determine the end to ...

Страница 277: ...1 11 When you finish choose OK to save this configuration Note If PNNI routing is configured on the switch see Before You Begin on page 7 36 Fast APS 1 1 will be enabled once you have created an ATM NNI logical port including PNNI parameters on each end of the PNNI link connection For more information on using the PNNI routing protocol in your Lucent network see Chapter 21 Configuring PNNI Routing...

Страница 278: ...s a network device other than a Lucent switch Once you add this device object to the network map you can see the device status reachable or not For PSAX devices you can also launch the AQueView client from which other PSAX device specific configuration may be done You must enable editing for a network map before adding network objects This action locks the map and prevents other users from editing...

Страница 279: ...he operation and close the Add Equipment dialog box 6 Choose OK to close the Add Equipment Dialog box The network map displays an object icon representing the new external device 7 For the newly added object to be saved you must disable editing a From the Edit menu select Disable Editing b When asked to confirm choose Yes to save the changes or No to disable editing without saving any changes Tabl...

Страница 280: ...ght click on the icon and select Launch AQView Client AQueView must be installed on the same UNIX server or PC where the NavisEMS CBGX client is installed or the AQueView installed path must be accessible to the NavisEMS CBGX client Adding NMS Router or Network Objects To add an NMS Router or Network object to a network map 1 Open a map on network 2 From the Edit menu select Create 3 Select Equipm...

Страница 281: ...ctive network map Continue placing objects on the map and press the OK to complete the operation and close the Add Equipment dialog box 7 Choose OK to close the Add Equipment Dialog box The network map displays an object icon representing the new external device Modifying a Device on the Map To modify an object on the map 1 Right click on the icon and select Edit Attributes The View Details dialog...

Страница 282: ...actual status of the connection To show a connection between objects on the map 1 On the network map verify that editing is enabled by viewing the Edit menu If it is enabled the first menu selection will be Disable Editing If it is not enabled from the Network Map View window select Edit Enable Editing 2 On the Edit menu select Create 3 Select Connector 4 Select Simple 5 Select the PSAX node on th...

Страница 283: ...ay Protocol BGP The external route information collected through these protocols is then aggregated and flooded through the AS VNN OSPF is typically configured over Lucent trunks This section describes how to configure loopback addresses area aggregates external route aggregates and virtual links for VNN OSPF It also describes how to configure VNN OSPF optimized flooding and VNN OSPF Name link sta...

Страница 284: ...ve filled in the fields choose OK to configure the VNN OSPF loopback address The Add VNN Loop back Address dialog box closes Configuring VNN OSPF Area Aggregates To configure a VNN OSPF area aggregate for a GX 550 or CBX 500 switch 1 Expand the instance node for the switch to which you want to add a VNN OSPF area aggregate 2 Expand the VNN class node 3 Right click on the VNN Area Aggregates class ...

Страница 285: ...ggregate applies from the pull down menu Summary default Area border routers generate summary link advertisements which describe inter area routes routes between areas to networks NSSA This choice is not a supported option for VNN OSPF area aggregates It is only supported for IP OSPF area aggregates Network Enter the IP address of the network or subnetwork that encompasses the range of addresses y...

Страница 286: ...gure 7 21 Figure 7 21 Add VNN Virtual Link Dialog Box 4 Complete the fields as described in Table 7 10 Table 7 10 Add VNN Virtual Link Dialog Box Fields Field Action Description Area ID Enter the area ID x x x x of the transit area which is the non backbone area that the virtual link traverses to connect to the backbone area This ID cannot be 0 0 0 0 the Area ID of the backbone area Areas are coll...

Страница 287: ...gates To configure VNN OSPF external route aggregates 1 Expand the instance node for the switch to which you want to add a VNN OSPF external route aggregation 2 Expand the VNN class node Neighbor Router ID Enter the router D IP address of the switch that is the neighbor on the other end of the virtual link The router ID IP address is configured when the switch is installed To determine the interna...

Страница 288: ... GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring Trunks Configuring VNN OSPF 3 Right click on the VNN External Route Aggregation class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add VNN External route Aggregation dialog box appears Figure 7 22 Figure 7 22 Add VNN External route Aggregation Dialog Box ...

Страница 289: ...ault The total cost is equal to the cost specified by the LSA only regardless of internal cost to ASBR If IC the cost specified by routing table entry for ASBR and EC the cost specified in the LSA then the Type 2 cost EC Note Type 1 routes are typically preferred over Type 2 routes The Type 2 metric assumes that routing between autonomous systems is the major cost of routing a packet and eliminate...

Страница 290: ...parameters Only Metric Type and Advertise Matching fields may be modified 3 When you are done modifying fields choose OK to save the changes The Modify VNN External Route Aggregation dialog box closes Note VNN OSPF external aggregation will aggregate only those type 5 routing entries that match the Type configured in external aggregation For example if routes are configured as 10 10 1 1 and 10 10 ...

Страница 291: ...in a Lucent switch network To configure external route aggregates for OSPF 1 Expand the instance node for the switch to which you want to add an OSPF external route aggregation 2 Expand the IP Services class node 3 Right click on the OSPF External Route Aggregation class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add OSPF External route Aggregation dialog box appears Figure 7 23 Figure 7 23 Add ...

Страница 292: ...g fields choose OK to save the changes The Modify OSPF External Route Aggregation dialog box closes Deleting OSPF External Route Aggregates To delete an existing OSPF external route aggregate 1 Right click on the instance node for the OSPF external route aggregation you want to delete and select Delete A message box appears with the following message Are you sure you want to delete the selected ob...

Страница 293: ...ooding it is helpful to compare it with how standard OSPF flooding works between switches in the same area connected by multiple parallel trunks Standard OSPF flooding With standard OSPF flooding one switch floods an LSA on all of its parallel trunk interfaces and the other switch receives this LSA on all of these interfaces The receiving switch in turn floods the same LSA on all of its parallel t...

Страница 294: ...faces between the two switches as occurs with standard OSPF flooding These LSAs are added to the neighbor switch retransmission list and not to the OSPF neighbor retransmission list on that trunk If the flooding trunk fails the switch selects a new flooding trunk that inherits the neighbor switch retransmission list from the original flooding trunk This ensures that LSAs will be retransmitted on t...

Страница 295: ... support the VNN OSPF optimized flooding feature Switches on which VNN OSPF optimized flooding is disabled or unsupported will use standard OSPF flooding mechanisms to flood the LSAs on all multiple parallel trunk interfaces The switch receiving the LSA will still acknowledge the LSA on the interface on which it was received regardless of whether VNN OSPF optimized flooding is supported on that sw...

Страница 296: ...ing VNN OSPF optimized flooding enables you to reduce the number of identical LSAs that are flooded received and processed between Lucent switches in the same area connected by multiple parallel trunks Clear the box to disable VNN OSPF optimized flooding for this switch This is the default setting 3 Choose OK to save your changes and close the dialog box Note Lucent recommends that you enable VNN ...

Страница 297: ...sed they are not installed in the VNN database nor flooded over VNN trunk interfaces However this suppresses only the default VNN network service access point NSAP address binding Any other node prefixes or port prefixes that you configure will still generate NAME 3 and SUMM_NM 3 LSAs Enabling and Disabling VNN Name LSAs To enable or disable Name LSA flooding on a CBX 500 or GX 550 switch 1 Right ...

Страница 298: ...lation field Disabled default Leave this check box unchecked to suppress flooding of NAME 3 and SUMM_NM 3 LSAs for the specified switch Use this option if the switch does not need to interoperate with PNNI switches in your network Enabled Check this check box to enable flooding of NAME 3 and SUMM_NM 3 LSAs for the specified switch Use this option if the switch must interoperate with PNNI switches ...

Страница 299: ... on page 8 16 Configuring ATMoMPLS Trunk Logical Ports on page 8 34 Configuring the ATMoMPLS Trunk on page 8 43 Note Use of the ATMoMPLS Trunking feature requires an additional license which you must purchase from Lucent Technologies The license is supplied as a 50 byte alphanumeric key that you enter at the Navis EMS CBGX command line to unlock ATMoMPLS management features for use on the number o...

Страница 300: ...ning if you approach the maximum limit enabling you to upgrade your license in advance should you expect to exceed the maximum number of switches in the future This section contains the following topics How to Order an ATMoMPLS Trunking License on page 8 2 Managing License Keys With Navis EMS CBGX on page 8 3 How the ATMoMPLS License Works on page 8 4 How to Order an ATMoMPLS Trunking License Befo...

Страница 301: ...ucent Technologies you will need the following information To apply for a license key please use the following URL http www lucent com products license atmompls html Managing License Keys With Navis EMS CBGX Navis EMS CBGX enables you to manage ATMoMPLS license keys and to determine the number of allocated and available nodes based on your license See Chapter 3 Managing License Keys with Navis EMS...

Страница 302: ...le switches up to the maximum number permitted by the license Bound to the Host ID of the NMS Managed switches are identified by their IP address but the license key is bound to the Host ID of the NMS If you change the Host ID of the NMS contact Lucent Technologies to update your ATMoMPLS license key This means you will be issued with an additional license key if you use a backup standby NMS Appli...

Страница 303: ... digits of the software revision number A new license key is required if you upgrade to a new software release Installing patch releases that increment the seventh and eights digits of the revision number does not demand that you obtain a new license key MPLS CBX GX Switches Navis EMS CBGX Mgmt Domain 1 License key Backup NMS Host ID b Host ID a Nodes 50 V 09 01 01 License key Host ID b Nodes 50 V...

Страница 304: ...The MPLS LSPs are used to tunnel data between the ATM networks Figure 8 2 Figure 8 2 Multiservice MPLS Core Solution This feature is designed to provide interoperability with Juniper T series T640 T320 routers running JUNOS Release 6 4 or above Management of the ATM network which is distributed over the MPLS core works in the same way as management of any ATM network Configuration and management o...

Страница 305: ...nteroperability with Lucent switches via ATMoMPLS trunking The required software release is JUNOS Release 6 4 or above Table 8 1 Supported Lucent Switches and Modules for ATMoMPLS Trunking Switch Supported Modules CBX 3500 4 port OC 12c STM 4 module with Universal IOP module CBX 500 1 port OC 12c STM 4 module with 128MB on CBX 500 IOM1 module GX 550 1 port OC 12c STM 4 Phy module with 128MB on GX ...

Страница 306: ...o MPLS Core Network The ATMoMPLS trunk provides the logical link between the ATM edge switches As Figure 8 4 shows each ATMoMPLS trunk between a pair of ATM edge switches is matched with a virtual trunk known as a Lucent Trunk VPN between a pair of MPLS LERs that are directly connected to the ATM edge switches Between the two MPLS LERs traffic engineered MPLS LSPs are signalled by RSVP TE Figure 8...

Страница 307: ...R nrt and UBR VCCs and VPCs traversing the ATMoMPLS trunk Support for point to multipoint PVCs SVCs and SPVCs Ability to define management only trunks VNN single and multi area support Support for Layer 2 VNN VPNs Support for 1 1 bi directional fast Automatic Protection Switching APS Support for administrative and path control Load balancing and least cost routing features OAM F5 end to end suppor...

Страница 308: ...c from ATM trunks to MPLS LSPs on ingress Mapping traffic from the MPLS LSPs on the high speed interfaces of the MPLS LER to the ATM trunks while preserving QoS characteristics For every ATMoMPLS trunk configured between an ATM switch and an MPLS LER the MPLS router creates a Lucent Trunk VPN logical entity Each Lucent Trunk VPN carries traffic on 32 VPIs so that One VPI is associated with signall...

Страница 309: ... cell to the Lucent ATM switch and implements scheduling of the 4 queues based on the bandwidth information for the QoS classes that is configured on the Lucent Trunk VPN The Lucent Trunk VPN solution is based on a two layer MPLS stack as follows The outer label known as the tunnel label carries traffic from the ingress MPLS LER to the egress MPLS LER The inner label known as the VPN label is used...

Страница 310: ...itches you should configure the MPLS LERs This involves two key configuration tasks 1 Create MPLS tunnels between the LERs specify bandwidth requirements for the tunnels and select path protection attributes for the backup tunnels 2 Provision the Lucent Trunk VPN on the ATM interfaces of the MPLS LER The two endpoints of the Lucent Trunk VPN are created by specifying a Trunk ID that is local to th...

Страница 311: ...which enables interoperability between Lucent and non Lucent switches by providing a standard interface type over which a link management protocol can run If the physical port is configured correctly ATMoMPLS UNI and ATMoMPLS NNI options for LPort Type are available when configuring a feeder port for an ATMoMPLS trunk See Configuring Feeder Logical Ports on page 8 16 Step 3 Configure ATMoMPLS Trun...

Страница 312: ...Uni directional APS is not supported The APS feature is available on all types of CBX and GX optical interfaces APS allows you to protect optical interfaces by provisioning a backup protection port that automatically takes over for the primary working port when a physical layer fault or module failure occurs To access the physical port configuration settings using Navis EMS CBGX 1 Expand the Cards...

Страница 313: ...s ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 058 15 The Modify PPort dialog box appears Figure 8 7 displays an example for an ATM OC 12c STM physical port 4 In the APS tab modify the redundancy settings and click OK Figure 8 7 Modify PPort Dialog Box ATM OC 12c STM ...

Страница 314: ...ts In an ATMoMPLS logical port configuration the range of VPI VCI values is derived from the Trunk ID bits value The method of calculation is not user configurable The VPI VCI values are calculated as follows VPI bits Trunk ID bits 5 VCI bits 14 VPI bits Controls the Trunk ID Bits value that determines the number of valid Trunk IDs If the physical port is configured correctly the following LPort T...

Страница 315: ...eeder logical port When you configure logical ports the Add Logical Port dialog box contains a variety of parameters that you must configure During this procedure use the tabs in the Add Logical Port dialog box to configure General Administrative ATM ATM FCP CBX 500 IOM1 module only ILMI OAM and NTM tabs for the ATMoMPLS UNI NNI logical port For the feeder logical port you need to configure the Ba...

Страница 316: ...sical port the logical port is created on both physical ports of the APS pair General Attributes For ATMoMPLS UNI NNI feeder logical ports you need to configure the Trunk ID bits field Enter a value to set the number of bits in the header used to identify the Trunk ID The default value is set to 3 corresponding to a maximum number of 8 unique trunk IDs for ATMoMPLS UNI or 5 corresponding to a maxi...

Страница 317: ...sed to identify the Trunk ID ATMoMPLS UNI Range 1 to 3 The default value is 3 corresponding to the maximum number of 23 8 unique IDs ATMoMPLS NNI Range 1 to 5 The default value is 5 corresponding to the maximum number of 25 32 unique IDs Bulk Statistics for LPort Bulk Statistics settings allow you to enable disable statistics collection from the logical port These option are available with the Nav...

Страница 318: ...g trunk overflow or failure conditions This feature is used with VNN VPN Public default Routes SVCs originating from this port over dedicated VNN VPN trunks However in the event of failure the customer s traffic is allowed to run over common trunks shared by a variety of different customers Restricted Uses SVCs originating from this port only for dedicated VNN VPN trunks A customer using this mode...

Страница 319: ...h Kbps Allocated Enter the amount of bandwidth for this logical port The default is the amount of bandwidth remaining from the physical clock rate less any logical ports already configured For an ATMoMPLS feeder logical port assign a minimal amount of bandwidth for control data Available The total amount of bandwidth available for this logical port For specific guidelines on configuring bandwidth ...

Страница 320: ...35 Enter the number of seconds for which you want the trace results to be maintained in the switch Enter a value between 1 and 65535 or accept the default value 600 Maximum Records 1 200 Enter the number of trace records that can be present for this LPort Enter a value between 1 and 200 or accept the default value 20 Path Trace Boundary If this is a PNNI LPort you can set it to be a path trace bou...

Страница 321: ...ble 8 5 Table 8 5 Add Logical Port ATM Tab Fields Field Action Description Class Specifies the logical port connection type either Direct or Virtual Set to Direct when you configure the first UNI NNI logical port on this physical port Set to Virtual when you configure subsequent UNI NNI ports on this physical port Type Specifies whether this port connects to another switch or endsystem or to a rou...

Страница 322: ... CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information User UPC Function Specifies the usage parameter control UPC function for PVCs and SVCs You can also enable or disable the UPC function for individual PVCs If you want to use the UPC function on a per PVC basis you must enable the UPC function on the logical port Enabled default Enables the UPC function for circuits on this logical port for all Q...

Страница 323: ...s that do not conform to the traffic parameters are dropped or tagged as they come into the port Disabled All traffic including non conforming traffic passes in through the port If you disable the NPC function on a logical port QoS is no longer guaranteed on the network due to the potential for increasing the CLR on network circuits For this reason Lucent recommends that you leave the NPC function...

Страница 324: ...gement CCRM cells are a subset of the ATM Forum s ATM Traffic Management Version 4 0 ABR resource management RM cells Refer to Chapter 6 Working with the ATM FCP for more information about ATM FCP attributes The ATM FCP tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box is shown in Figure 8 13 Figure 8 13 Add Logical Port ATM FCP Tab Note Contact a qualified Lucent organization for network design validation b...

Страница 325: ...to not generate RM type cells by selecting the No Loop option in the pull down list These types of cells let you configure different closed loop flow control algorithms on the same IOM Because RM cells are generated in the backward direction the type of RM cells generated depends on the configuration of the logical port through which they are transmitted From the pull down list choose one of the f...

Страница 326: ...orts the Dynamic option is enabled by default with 0 values The QoS tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box is shown in Figure 8 14 Figure 8 14 Add Logical Port QoS Tab For ATMoMPLS UNI NNI feeder logical ports you can configure the fields in the QoS tab as described in Table 8 7 Table 8 7 Add Logical Port QoS Tab Fields Column Action Description Class For each row in the table this column displays...

Страница 327: ...sses are set to Fixed ensure that all four values add up to 100 so that you do not waste bandwidth Routing Metric The routing metric configured for the logical port Routing metrics allow the switch to select less congested paths and avoid congested paths when transferring data Routing metric options are Cell Frame Delay Variation Measures the average variation in delay between one cell frame and t...

Страница 328: ...nsures that the port will deliver all user data for that service class without unanticipated delays or excessive cell loss A value of 200 effectively doubles the virtual bandwidth available for that service class However if all network traffic attempts to use the network resources at precisely the same time for example during multiple file transfer sessions over the same trunk some traffic may be ...

Страница 329: ... 15 Enter the ID of the VPI you want to use for ILMI polling The default value is zero 0 VCI Id 0 1023 Enter the ID of the VCI you want to used for ILMI polling The default value is 16 Loss Threshold K Enter a value for the number of times K the logical port will issue an ILMI poll before the link is considered down If no responses are seen in K x T seconds the link is considered down The default ...

Страница 330: ...es Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Trunks Configuring Feeder Logical Ports NTM Tab The NTM tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box is shown in Figure 8 16 Figure 8 16 Add Logical Port NTM Tab ...

Страница 331: ... Congestion CT0 Cells Sec 0 0 If the Disable NTM box is not checked you can move the slider to change this parameter Choosing the Set Defaults button will set the default values for the Severe Congestion and Minor Congestion parameters Minor Congestion CT2 Cells Sec 0 0 If the Disable NTM box is not checked you can move the slider to change this parameter Choosing the Set Defaults button will set ...

Страница 332: ...been configured you can define an ATMoMPLS Trunk logical port To configure an ATMoMPLS trunk logical port using Navis EMS CBGX 1 Expand the node for the PPort or subport to which you want to add an LPort The LPorts node appears under the PPort or subport node Figure 8 17 Managing LPorts 2 Right click on the LPorts node and select Add from the pop up menu see Figure 8 17 The Add Logical Port dialog...

Страница 333: ... bits in the feeder logical port configuration You can configure the Trunk ID value if desired using the General tab Refer to the following sections for information about the attributes ATMoMPLS Trunk Logical Port General Attributes on page 8 35 ATMoMPLS Trunk Logical Port Administrative Attributes on page 8 37 ATMoMPLS Trunk Logical Port QoS Attributes on page 8 40 ATMoMPLS Trunk Logical Port Tra...

Страница 334: ...ts to down the physical port is also considered down Up default Activates the port Down Saves the configuration in the database without activating the port or takes the port off line to run diagnostics Trunk ID bits 1 3 The Trunk ID Bits value is a read only value that was configured during definition of the ATMoMPLS UNI or ATMoMPLS NNI feeder port See Configuring Feeder Logical Ports on page 8 16...

Страница 335: ...eck box to enable statistics collection for PVCs on the logical port To collect statistics on circuits you must also enable Bulk Statistics on each individual circuit Clear the check box default to disable statistics collection on all PVCs on this logical port Note Bulk Statistics is not supported on the 1 Port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 card Template Select the check box to save these settings as a temp...

Страница 336: ...th trace CrankBack Info Required Select the check box to enable collection of crankback information for circuits that pass through this logical port Crankback information is information about dynamic rerouting of call setups around failed nodes or links or links with insufficient resources on the traced path Clear the check box default to disable crankback information collection Pass Along Request...

Страница 337: ...ng in through this LPort will not be honored This switch will not add any trace information and will not forward the trace request any further If it is set on the outgoing port then this node will be the trace destination node When this LPort is the outgoing LPort for a call then it is assumed that the path trace request has reached its destination and has completed normally This switch will add i...

Страница 338: ...in Table 8 12 Table 8 12 Add Logical Port QoS Tab Fields Column Action Description Class For each row in the table this column displays the QoS class to which settings in other columns relate Bandwidth Allocation For each service class type select one of the following from the pull down list Dynamic Not available for ATMoMPLS Trunk LPorts Fixed Specifies that a percentage of bandwidth be reserved ...

Страница 339: ...queueing delays so it does not affect port congestion Admin Cost Measures the administrative cost associated with the logical port The administrative cost is specified by the administrator enabling you to adjust path selection manually Note For Frame Relay routing metrics apply only if the port is configured as a UNI DCE or UNI DTE logical port Oversubscription A minimum value of 100 to indicate t...

Страница 340: ...bandwidth allocation not for policing The Traffic Descriptors tab in the Add Logical Port dialog box is shown in Figure 8 22 Figure 8 22 Add Logical Port Traffic Descriptors Tab Choosing the Select button accesses the Set Signaling Traffic Descriptors dialog box for the Forward and Reverse direction for the Node to Node Mgmt and Trunk Signaling fields These fields enable you to modify the traffic ...

Страница 341: ...cal ports To configure an ATMoMPLS trunk between two Lucent switches using Navis EMS CBGX 1 In the Navis EMS CBGX window select the Trunks node You can access the Trunks node from the switch or from an LPort node When you create a trunk from an LPort node the selected LPort is automatically set as Endpoint 1 of the new trunk Figure 8 23 Managing Trunks 2 Perform one of the following Select Add fro...

Страница 342: ...X 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Trunks Configuring the ATMoMPLS Trunk Figure 8 24 Add Trunk Dialog Box 3 In the Add Trunk dialog box choose the Select button 4 The Select Trunk Endpoints dialog box appears Figure 8 25 Figure 8 25 Select Trunk Endpoints Dialog Box ...

Страница 343: ...nk Administrative Tab Field Action Description Trunk Name Enter a unique alphanumeric name to identify the trunk Trunk Type Select the type of trunk backup services this trunk provides from the pull down list Options include Normal Indicates that this trunk offers no backup service Primary Indicates that this trunk will act as the main trunk connection in a backup service Backup Indicates that thi...

Страница 344: ...nt traffic This trunk option does not support SVC addressing information If this is the only trunk between two nodes and you configure this option for it then you effectively prevent SVC traffic from traversing this trunk Layer 2 VPN Name Select a Layer2 Virtual Private Network VPN name The default is Public To select a different Layer2 VPN name clear the Default check box and choose the Select La...

Страница 345: ...anges from down to up The static delay value is used in conjunction with the end to end delay routing metric to enable you to route circuits over trunks with the lowest end to end delay Dynamic Delay in microsec Represents the measured one way delay in units of 100 msecs This measurement is made continually on operational trunks Under most conditions the dynamic delay value will match the static d...

Страница 346: ...Beta Draft Confidential 8 481 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Trunks Configuring the ATMoMPLS Trunk ...

Страница 347: ...n be scaled because higher VC counts are supported in the core reducing the number of trunks required for meshing ATM switches Lucent s ATM switches CBX 3500 CBX 500 and GX 550 can interoperate with other vendor s ATM switches through an MPLS core by using an industry standard approach CBX and GX switches can be part of either VNN or PNNI based networks Note Use of the ATMoMPLS Trunking feature re...

Страница 348: ...r CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Gateway Solution on CBX 3500 This chapter contains ATM Over MPLS Application Overview Network wide MPLS Settings Configuring a Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network Configuring PWE3 Over MPLS Core Network ...

Страница 349: ...d to provide interoperability with Juniper T series T640 and T320 routers running JUNOS Release 6 4 or above For more information on this feature and complete configuration instructions see Chapter 8 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Trunks Layer 2 Tunnel Over an MPLS Core Network To enable a connection through an MPLS core network with two endpoints in different ATM or Frame Relay networks a Layer 2 tunn...

Страница 350: ...managed in order to emulate the behavior and characteristics of the native service Figure 9 1 illustrates this Layer 2 configuration showing multiple VNN and or PNNI circuits being tunneled through the Layer 2 tunnel Multiple Layer 2 tunnels can be multiplexed into a single PSN tunnel Figure 9 1 Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network Supported Modules The switches on the edge of the ATM network mus...

Страница 351: ...PLS backbone A PSN tunnel is created between the MPLS LERs CBX 3500 switches Using Pseudo Wire Edge to Edge Emulation PWE3 standards the Layer 2 MPLS VPN circuit PW is created from LER1 to LER 2 The signaling for PW setup is done using targeted LDP operating in downstream unsolicited label retention mode Multiple PWs can be created over the PSN tunnel using N 1 encapsulation maintaining a one to o...

Страница 352: ...n the PWE3 Tunnel over MPLS application Local and remote endpoints supported are FR FR and ATM ATM but not ATM FR or vice versa Frame Relay traffic is carried via ATM FR interworking functionality For configuration information see Configuring PWE3 Over MPLS Core Network on page 9 61 Table 9 1 PWE3 Tunnel Switch Guidelines Circuit LER Switches on Tunnel Ends ATM to ATM Any vendor switch supporting ...

Страница 353: ...itmap Each bit represents a property of the interface the exact semantics of each property represented being a local policy decision Each LSP can be assigned a resource affinity or a set of rules governing the interfaces which the LSP may use MPLS Affinities are selected for RSVP TE when creating a PSN tunnel Affinity mappings are maintained network wide The name of the affinity is mapped to the v...

Страница 354: ...icit route object RSVP routers that do not support the object will respond with an Unknown Object Class error The tunnel hop list defines the specific nodes that must be followed along a path in the network When defining a PSN tunnel Configuring a PSN Tunnel on page 9 43 the option to define a tunnel hop list is offered An MPLS tunnel hop list cannot be modified or deleted once it is associated wi...

Страница 355: ...from this list select the switch in the Assigned Switches list and click the left arrow button To reorder the switches in this list highlight the switch and click the up or down arrow button to move it up or down the list For each switch defined in this list the following fields are available Name displays the name of the switch Type displays the switch type for instance CBX 3500 LsrID displays th...

Страница 356: ...dwidth BW reserved for the PSN tunnel at the LERs is computed as This bandwidth is used to perform connection admission on PWs tunneled across the PSN tunnel For a successful call admission equivalent bandwidth computed for PW based on SLA requirements must be satisfied by the PSN tunnel available bandwidth A PSN tunnel can use IntServ and DiffServ profiles to manage QoS over a Layer 2 tunnel IntS...

Страница 357: ...ured will be shared between all the QoS classes dynamically during PWE3 set up or Layer 2 tunnel configuration This is a dynamic mode operation This approach is standard E LSP IntServJ Juniper s proprietary method of configuring signaling mapping between class types and bandwidth for up to four class types Class type CT is very similar to Class of Service COS Note that Juniper s class type is in r...

Страница 358: ...ated by Navis EMS CBGX MaxRate 0 4294967295Kbps Enter the maximum rate of the LSP in units of 1000 bits per second MeanRate 0 4294967295Kbps Enter the mean rate of the LSP in units of 1000 bits per second Max Burst Size 0 4294967295Kbps The maximum burst rate this LSP can forward data without dropping data in bytes IntServJ NetCT0BW 0 4294967295 Kbps NetCT1BW 0 4294967295 Kbps NetCT2BW 0 429496729...

Страница 359: ...s and select Add The Add Diffserv dialog box will display Figure 9 6 Figure 9 6 Add Diffserv Dialog Box 4 Enter a unique alpha numeric name for this Intserv profile 5 In the Type field select the type of LSP to be used L LSP The MPLS Tunnel LSP will be a single QoS LSP based on the PSCID configured on DiffServ profile E LSP A single LSP can be used to support more than one PHB A PHB can be thought...

Страница 360: ... 3500 supports eight PSCIDs that determine the type of forwarding required on the LSP Select from the following PSCIDs DF Drop Precedence0 typically used for UBR ABR with CLP 0 DF Drop Precedence1 typically used for UBR ABR with CLP 1 AF1 Drop Precedence0 typically used for VBR Nrt with CLP 0 AF1 Drop Precedence1 typically used for VBR Nrt with CLP 1 AF2 Drop Precedence0 typically used for VBR RT ...

Страница 361: ... this field Each PHBID must be mapped to a DiffServ forwarding class which is then mapped to an EXP bit on the switch Select from the following options DF Drop Precedence0 typically used for UBR ABR with CLP 0 DF Drop Precedence1 typically used for UBR ABR with CLP 1 AF1 Drop Precedence0 typically used for VBR Nrt with CLP 0 AF1 Drop Precedence1 typically used for VBR Nrt with CLP 1 AF2 Drop Prece...

Страница 362: ...ust be CBX 3500 switches Step 1 Configure node based MPLS parameters LSR ID and Valid MPLS Path Bits This configuration is done at the switch level to create the interfaces See Configuring Node based MPLS Parameters on page 9 17 Step 2 Configure PPP LPorts for each endpoint of the physical link of the PPP configuration See Adding a PPP LPort on page 9 19 Step 3 Create an IP LPort under the PPP LPo...

Страница 363: ...nfigured at the switch level prior to creating a Layer 2 tunnel These are found on the MPLS tab of the Modify Switch dialog box To configure the MPLS parameters on the switch 1 Expand the network that includes the desired switch 2 Expand the Switches class node 3 Right click on the switch 4 Select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Switch dialog box appears Figure 9 7 Figure 9 7 Modify Switch ...

Страница 364: ...ed This field will not be available if the User Configured LSR ID box is checked User Configured LSR ID To enter the IP address of the LSR check the User Configured LSR ID box then enter the IP address of the LSR ID assigned to this switch Static Label Max 0 or 16 65535 The static label maximum is defined within a label range of zero 0 65535 Zero 0 16 is reserved for MPLS Set the maximum label to ...

Страница 365: ...ode if applicable then expand the Switches node 2 Double click on the switch to which you want to add a logical port 3 Expand the Cards class node and select the ULC POS card on which you want to add an LPort 4 Expand the ULC POS card node then expand the PPorts class node to display the PPort instance nodes 5 Expand the Subports class node then the Subport instance node 6 Right click on the LPort...

Страница 366: ... tabs in the Add Logical Port dialog box as described in Table 9 6 Table 9 6 Add Logical Port Dialog Box Tabs Tab See General General Attributes for POS LPorts on page 9 21 Administrative Administrative Attributes for POS LPorts on page 9 22 QoS QoS Attributes for POS LPorts on page 9 23 Trap Control Trap Control Attributes on page 9 26 MPLS MPLS Attributes for POS LPorts on page 9 28 Congestion C...

Страница 367: ...atistics for LPort Enables statistics collection from the logical port by the NavisXtend Statistics Server To collect statistics at the logical port level Bulk Statistics must also be enabled at the switch level Clear the check box default to disable statistics collection Bulk Statistics for All PVCs on LPort Enables statistics collection for PVCs on the logical port To collect statistics on circu...

Страница 368: ...rative tab of the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 9 10 and complete the fields as described in Table 9 8 Figure 9 10 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab Template Saves these settings as a template to configure another logical port with similar options To create a template enable the Template field The default is disabled See Using Templates on page 2 23 for more information on templates Table 9...

Страница 369: ... can allocate bandwidth for circuits based on their QoS services on a logical port Lucent recommends that you set the logical port QoS fixed and dynamic options before you provision circuits Under certain conditions if you change the bandwidth from dynamic to fixed after you provision circuits one or more QoS classes may display negative bandwidth Table 9 8 Add Logical Port Administrative Tab Fiel...

Страница 370: ...TM Over MPLS Gateway Solution on CBX 3500 Configuring a Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network To set the QoS Parameters 1 In the Add Logical Port dialog box select the QoS tab Figure 9 11 Figure 9 11 Add Logical Port QoS Tab 2 Complete the required fields described in Table 9 9 for each service class listed in the Class field ...

Страница 371: ...xed you are specifying the maximum bandwidth to reserve for the circuits of this type of traffic If the network requests a circuit that exceeds the fixed value the circuit cannot be created If you have service classes set to Dynamic any remaining bandwidth percentage will be allocated to the circuits of those service classes as needed For example if UFR is Fixed at 55 and the VFR classes are set t...

Страница 372: ...This value must be between 100 and 1000 In general you can leave these values set to 100 since the Call Master Connection Admission Control CAC algorithm ensures that you can pack circuits on a port without losing data or Quality of Service If however after monitoring your network you determine that users of a particular service class are reserving more bandwidth than they are actually using you c...

Страница 373: ...rding to how sensitive this port needs to be to network congestion Options include Low Generates a trap at the first sign of congestion High Generates traps for serious network congestion Zero default Disables congestion threshold If you enter zero no traps are generated for this logical port Frame Err Min 0 13684 Enter a value from 0 to 16384 to configure the threshold of frame errors on this log...

Страница 374: ... ATM Over MPLS Gateway Solution on CBX 3500 Configuring a Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network MPLS Attributes for POS LPorts The MPLS tab Figure 9 13 allows you to set the QoS Exp Mapping and MPLS administrative parameters Complete the fields in the MPLS tab as described in Table 9 11 Figure 9 13 Add Logical Port MPLS Tab ...

Страница 375: ... value used to represent QoS 1 class Best Effort MPLS Admin Status Enable MPLS protocols on this interface by placing a check in the checkbox or clear the checkbox to disable Te Admin Groups Select an MPLS Affinity from the pull down list to associate with this interface This will be used as a constraint in the calculation of constraint based routing for an MPLS tunnel DiffServ Index Select a Diff...

Страница 376: ...l Admission Control field When enabled the port rejects a circuit creation request if there is not enough available bandwidth on that logical port When disabled default the port attempts to create a circuit even if there is not enough available bandwidth on that logical port For information about Bandwidth Allocation see About Logical Port Bandwidth on page 2 16 If you disable Call Admission Contr...

Страница 377: ... Logical Port Point to Point Tab Table 9 12 Add Modify Logical Port Point to Point Tab Element Description Echo Request Send To Remote User Select On to send keep alive packets to the remote user Maximum Tries 1 99 Enter a number from 1 to 99 that represents the maximum number of keep alive packets sent to the remote user Interval 1 99 Enter a number from 1 to 99 that represents the time interval ...

Страница 378: ...the UNI NNI feeder LPort on which you want to add an IP LPort 2 Right click on the IP LPort class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add IP LPort dialog box appears Figure 9 16 Figure 9 16 Add IP Lport Dialog Box 3 Complete the fields in the Add IP LPort dialog box as described in Table 9 13 Table 9 13 Add IP LPort Fields Field Action Description Bound IP VPN Name Name of VPN to which th...

Страница 379: ...of the following options Enable default Specifies that IP forwarding will be allowed from this logical port to a unicast address Disable Indicates that IP forwarding will not be allowed from this logical port to a unicast address The specific unicast addresses are specified for each IP interface Broadcast Select one of the following options Enable default Specifies that IP forwarding will be allow...

Страница 380: ... on IP LPorts Once the IP LPort is configured RSVP TE is automatically enabled RSVP TE is necessary to complete the ATMoMPLS tunnel However if you wish to modify RSVP TE 1 In the switch object locator tree select the RSVP TE instance node under the RsvpTE class node Figure 9 17 Figure 9 17 RsvpTE Instance Node in Switch Tab 2 Right click on the RSVP TE instance node and select Modify The Modify Rs...

Страница 381: ...fy RSVP TE Dialog Box Fields Field Description RsvpTE Enable When the IP Lport is created RSVP TE is enabled by default To disable uncheck the box Refresh Multiple 1 65535 The RSVP value K which is the number of unresponded Path or Resv refresh attempts which must be made spaced by the refresh interval before the state is deemed to have timed out The default is three After changing this value the ...

Страница 382: ...esh time is increased gradually each time a refresh timer pops The change will affect both new and existing LSPs The default is 30000 Hello Enable Indicates whether the RSVP Hello mechanism is enabled on this LPort The Hello mechanism is used for node level connectivity verification This field is disabled by default Hello Failure Interval MAX The default period in msecs between sending Hello messa...

Страница 383: ...ceived The value of the field may be changed at any time Such a change will take effect for subsequent messages The default is 5000 Rapid Retry Limit 0 65535 The maximum number of times a message is resent if an acknowledgement is not received The value of the field may be changed at any time Such a change will take effect for subsequent messages The default is three Bundle Outgoing Messages This ...

Страница 384: ...the configuration choose OK to save the changes and close the dialog box Specifying the IP Interface Address The IP interface address is used by the MPLS network to identify endpoints To specify the IP interface address for an IP LPort 1 Expand the instance node for the IP LPort for which you want to specify the IP interface address 2 Right click on the IP Interface Address class node and select A...

Страница 385: ...ck on the OSPF Interface class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add OSPF IP Interface dialog box appears Figure 9 20 Table 9 15 Add IP Interface Address Dialog Box Fields Field Action Description Unicast Address IP Address Specify the IP address for this interface Interface addresses can be distributed across IP logical ports as required Network Mask Specify the mask used to determine ...

Страница 386: ...want to locate this interface Area 0 0 0 0 is the network backbone area Areas are collections of networks hosts and routers The area ID identifies the area Admin State Select one of the following options Enable default This parameter allows this interface to communicate using IP OSPF In addition this interface can send or receive Hello packets Disable This parameter prevents this interface from co...

Страница 387: ...s a simple password authentication method that includes a password in all OSPF messages on an interface by interface basis When a router receives a message on an interface that uses simple password authentication the router checks the incoming OSPF message to see if the password is included in the message If the password is correct the message is processed normally If the password is not part of t...

Страница 388: ...k supports multiple router connections which are treated like point to point connections The IP addresses of the remote router s interfaces are advertised Point to Point default for PPP interfaces A point to point network joins two routers together The IP address of the neighboring router s interface is advertised Hello packets are sent to the neighbor at regular intervals based on the value that ...

Страница 389: ...eived Hello 1 65535 Enter a value between 1 and 65535 the default value is 10 seconds Specifies the number of seconds between router Hello messages This parameter controls the frequency of router Hello messages on an interface Router Dead 0 2147483647 Enter a value greater than 0 zero the default value is 40 seconds This value is a multiple of the Hello interval For example if the Hello interval i...

Страница 390: ...P TE from the pull down list 6 In the Source LSRID field from the pull down list select the Lucent switch that will be the data source for this tunnel 7 In the Destination LSRID field from the pull down list select the destination switch for this tunnel This destination switch can be a Lucent switch or other vendor equipment 8 Leave the Edit Non Lucent IP checkbox unchecked it s not available for ...

Страница 391: ...is checked two unidirectional tunnels will be configured one from the source LSR ID to the destination LSR ID and the other from the destination LSR ID to the source ID If RSVP Lite is chosen for the signalling protocol this field will be unavailable Tunnel Set Name When Tunnel Set is selected this field represents the name of the tunnel set If RSVP Lite is chosen for the signalling protocol this ...

Страница 392: ...nfiguration Backward Direction Tunnel Name Enter a unique name for the tunnel to be defined If Tunnel Set is selected the tunnel name is automatically determined based on the Tunnel Set name with _bwd prepended Note The Backward Direction settings are only available if Tunnel Set is selected It represents tunnel ingress configuration for the destination LSR ID Admin Status This field indicates whe...

Страница 393: ...VP Signalling Attributes The second tab displayed in the Add Tunnel dialog box depends on which signalling protocol was selected for this tunnel Table 9 18 lists the possible signalling protocols and applications Table 9 18 Signalling Protocol Tabs in Add Tunnel Dialog Box Signalling Protocol Application See RSVP TE PWE3 over MPLS core network RSVP TE Attributes on page 9 48 Layer 2 tunnel over MP...

Страница 394: ...g box Table 9 19 Add Tunnel RSVP TE Tab Fields Field Description Record Route Select Yes for the RSVP TE record route to be enabled If it is enabled RSVP TE will carry the exact route record under RESV message Affinity Any The resource class general inclusion constraint This is a bitmask where each bit specifies a resource class for the links on this route Each logical interface must be a member o...

Страница 395: ...n constraint This is a bitmask that specifies a resource class of which the links on this route must not be a member Select an MPLS affinity to exclude from the available MPLS affinities on the network Tunnel Hop List Specifies the explicit route hops for this tunnel Select a tunnel hop list from the pull down list Table 9 19 Add Tunnel RSVP TE Tab Fields Continued Field Description Note Table 9 2...

Страница 396: ...o the outgoing interface for this ingress tunnel from the source LSR ID to the destination LSR ID Endpoint 2 This field is only used when the Tunnel Set option is configured for the tunnel This field should be set to the outgoing interface for the ingress tunnel starting at the destination LSR ID and terminating on the source LSR ID Input Label Endpoint 1 This field is only used when the Tunnel Se...

Страница 397: ...es like a VNN direct trunk or PNNI link any circuit can be configured over it In this case the Layer 2 tunnel is statically configured and doesn t use LDP Layer 2 tunnels endpoints must be configured on like ATM or Frame Relay endpoints ATM ATM or FR FR on a CBX 3500 switch with POS cards installed and configured To configure a Layer 2 Tunnel 1 In the Network object tree expand the instance node f...

Страница 398: ...The mode describes the number of cells and PVCs in an MPLS packet going through the Layer2 tunnel In this release the only available option is Single n 1 single cell many PVCs 8 In the Type field select one of the following from the pull down list Lucent Proprietary Select for Layer 2 tunnel over MPLS Forwarding is supported as per PWE3 encapsulation Routing and signaling is as per VNN or PNNI bas...

Страница 399: ...RSVP Lite and Static label This value defines the inner label of the Layer 2 tunnel from the source node to the destination node Label Backward 0 max Enter a value in the range displayed The range is determined based on the configuration of MPLS switch attributes from RSVP Lite and Static label This value defines the inner label of the Layer 2 tunnel from the destination node to the source node Tu...

Страница 400: ...X 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Gateway Solution on CBX 3500 Configuring a Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network Layer 2 Tunnel ATM Attributes Select the ATM tab Figure 9 26 and complete the fields as described in Table 9 22 Figure 9 26 Add Layer2 Tunnel ATM Tab ...

Страница 401: ...ixed Specifies that a percentage of bandwidth be reserved for the service class If the network requests a circuit that exceeds the fixed value the circuit cannot be created If all four service classes are set to Fixed all four values should equal 100 bandwidth If the Layer 2 tunnel type is set to Lucent Proprietary or Atmforum you can select Fixed or Dynamic from the pull down list then specify th...

Страница 402: ...nk initializes and it is only updated when the trunk state changes from Down to Up The static delay value is used in conjunction with the end to end delay routing metric to enable you to route circuits over trunks with the lowest end to end delay To modify the Static Delay value see page 7 4 Hold Down Timer 0 max Enter a value between zero 0 and 65535 seconds Hold down timer allows you to configur...

Страница 403: ...ormation If this is the only tunnel between two nodes and you configure this option for it then you effectively prevent SVC traffic from traversing this tunnel Admin Cost Enter a value from 1 65534 that defines the cost of using this tunnel for a virtual circuit VC when a VC is being dynamically created on the switch The lower the administrative cost of the path the more likely OSPF will select it...

Страница 404: ...P Routing Enable IP routing for the trunk by selecting the check box If disabled unchecked the trunk is reserved for use by VNN Also activates the Trunk IP Area ID and Type of Service ToS Zero Metric fields See the IP Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 and B STDX 9000 for more information IP Area The OSPF Area ID used by IP Services See the IP Services Configuration Guide for CBX 35...

Страница 405: ...ve the same aggregation token or if one link has an aggregation token value of zero 0 If the aggregation tokens of different outside links are not equal and nonzero each will be advertised in a separate horizontal link PTSE by the associated parent LGN nodes Note The aggregation token value is important only for outside links where the neighboring nodes belong in different peer groups Static Delay...

Страница 406: ... a Layer 2 Tunnel Over MPLS Core Network Configuring an ATM or FR Circuit over a Layer 2 Tunnel After the Layer 2 tunnel is configured you can configure a circuit over the MPLS core See the following chapters for circuit configuration information Chapter 10 Configuring ATM PVCs Chapter 17 Configuring SVC Parameters Chapter 9 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Gateway Solution on CBX 3500 ...

Страница 407: ...r FR Circuit on page 9 68 1 The data path or transport LSP Tunnel exists between local and remote PE See the following for configuration information Adding a PPP LPort on page 9 19 Adding an IP LPort on page 9 32 Specifying the IP Interface Address on page 9 38 Configuring OSPF IP Parameters on page 9 39 Configuring a PSN Tunnel on page 9 43 2 The targeted LDP entity exists To verify that an LDP e...

Страница 408: ...label distribution peers with respect to the binding information they exchange If two LSRs are label distribution peers there is said to be a label distribution adjacency between them Configure an LDP session between each pair of switches on which a PWE3 connection will be created To configure LDP 1 In the Network object tree expand the instance node for the network that contains the switch 2 Expa...

Страница 409: ...port connection is bad or that the peer has failed and it terminates the LDP session by closing the transport connection After an LDP session has been established an LSR must receive an LDP PDU from the peer at least once every KeepAlive time period to ensure the peer restarts the session Keep Alive timer Hello Hold Timer 1 65535 An LSR maintains a hold timer with each Hello adjacency This hold ti...

Страница 410: ...using Label Distribution Protocol LDP operating in downstream unsolicited liberal label retention mode LDP defines the set of procedures and messages by which Label Switched Routers LSRs establish Label Switched Paths LSPs through a network by mapping network layer routing information directly to datalink layer switched paths The PWE3 circuit endpoints must be ATM UNI DCE or DTE or Frame Relay PWE...

Страница 411: ...W type identifies a particular PW Used in the PW ID field within the Pseudo Wire FEC Element when LDP signaling is used Encap Format The method for carrying the native ATM FR services over MPLS This field identifies the data encapsulation form that will be supported In this release ATM is the default and only choice for this field Pw Owner Indicates the protocol responsible for establishing this P...

Страница 412: ...d tunnel is bi directional the selected tunnel for EndPoint 1 will populate the Rmt Outbnd Tnl Id field for EndPoint 2 Similarly the Outbound Tnl Id selected for EndPoint 2 will populate the Rmt Outbnd Tnl Id field for Endpoint 1 Rmt Outbnd Tnl Id Populated automatically based on the tunnel selected in the Outbound Tnl Id field Inbnd Label The PW VC label used in the inbound direction i e packets ...

Страница 413: ...s field and the control word is sent by the local node with each packet Rmt Ctrl Word Populated automatically to match the Ctrl Word field Max Atm cells Specifies the maximum number of concatenated ATM cells that can be processed as a single PDU by the egress PE An ingress PE transmitting concatenated cells on this PW can concatenate a number of cells up to the value of this parameter but must not...

Страница 414: ...nfiguring PWE3 Over MPLS Core Network Configuring an ATM or FR Circuit After the Layer 2 tunnel or PWE3 tunnel is configured you can configure a circuit over the MPLS core See the following chapters for circuit configuration information Chapter 10 Configuring ATM PVCs Chapter 17 Configuring SVC Parameters Chapter 9 Configuring ATM Over MPLS Gateway Solution on CBX 3500 ...

Страница 415: ...Service Network Interworking page 10 40 Redirect page 10 34 Point to multipoint PMP page 10 71 In addition this chapter explains how to manually define PVCs and use the Move Circuit function See Chapter 11 Configuring Management Paths for information about management PVCs management SPVCs and management redirect PVCs Note For information about the virtual circuit VC capacity for various elements o...

Страница 416: ...he switch To view a card s attributes right click on the card instance node and select View from the pull down menu to display the View Card dialog box BIO modules can store the following number of PVC endpoints in PRAM depending on the type of module BIO2 modules can store 64 000 PVC endpoints 256 MB BIO1 modules can store 16 000 PVC endpoints 128 MB BIO1 modules can store 8 000 PVC endpoints BIO...

Страница 417: ...03 instead you would reserve only the 1K block needed for VPI 1 Connection entry resources are reserved for each VCC VPI on a per port basis This means that if you configure a phy card with port 1 having a VCC using a VPI VCI of 1 100 and port 2 also having a VCC with a VPI VCI of 1 100 you reserve 1K for each of the ports meaning 2K is consumed in total When you provision VPCs on a logical port t...

Страница 418: ...nt is always the caller Fixed endpoint is always designated endpoint 2 in NMS See the View PVC dialog box in Navis EMS CBGX described in the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Both endpoints are variable and primary Higher Service Name Binding SNB ID is always the caller Higher SNB ID is designated as endpoint 2 in NMS Use the Cvlistcontained command in Pro...

Страница 419: ... This section describes the differences in how the PVC Establishment Rate Control feature works when the VC Overload Control feature is enabled or disabled PVC Establishment Rate Control When VC Overload Control Is Enabled When the VC Overload Control feature is enabled the PVC Establishment Rate Control feature varies the rate between a minimum of 20 calls sec and the maximum allowed by the card ...

Страница 420: ...o maintain the integrity of the software In addition when the VC Overload Control feature is enabled it affects system performance in the following ways Number of successful completions during extended periods of high SVC setup and tear down requests increases up to 70 PVC reroute rates are greater than the current fixed maximum rate up to the point that the CPU utilization rate reaches 90 or the ...

Страница 421: ...vel a certain percentage of the following service requests are shed SVC originations PVC originations PVC routing SVC routing PVC reroutes Circuit tear downs The highest overload severity level is 100 where the card is in the highest overload condition and an application must shed all new service requests The lowest overload severity level is 1 An overload severity level of zero 0 indicates that t...

Страница 422: ...of sync card condition When enabled the Reliable Scalable Circuit feature enables you to add modify or delete standard or redirect PVCs in the following scenarios For information on Reliable Scalable Circuit reported error types see Appendix F Reliable Scalable Circuit Disabling the Reliable Scalable Circuit Feature To disable this feature edit the cascadeview cfg file and remove the sign from the...

Страница 423: ... you can enter is 63 which would give you 32 virtual channels numbered 32 to 63 The VPI VCI combination must be unique at each circuit endpoint including multipoint circuits As a result since a VPC has access to all valid VCIs a VCC or multipoint circuit that uses a VPI that is already assigned to a VPC cannot be established nor can a VPC be established if the selected VPI is already assigned to a...

Страница 424: ...f VCI 3 and 4 the ATM Forum reserves VCIs in this range for various purposes You should only use a VCI in the 1 31 range if you are certain that compatibility issues will not arise with any attached non Lucent equipment If you are configuring a circuit with ATM CE endpoints the VCI value defaults to 256 See page 10 9 for information about setting this value Note Navis EMS CBGX fills the VCI and VP...

Страница 425: ...e available Add Enables you to add a new PVC using the Add PVC dialog box See Defining a Point to Point Circuit Connection on page 10 13 Set Search Criteria for listing Enables you to enter a search string that determines how circuits are listed You may then use the Disable Search Criteria for listing command to cancel listing based on your search string Move Circuit Endpoint Enables you to move c...

Страница 426: ... Deletes an existing PVC View Enables you to view the PVC configuration in read only mode Oper Info Displays status information about the PVC in the PVC Operational Information dialog box See the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information on this menu option OAM Enables you to perform OAM loopback testing using the PVC OAM Loopback dialog box S...

Страница 427: ...Connection To set up a PVC connection between two UNI or NNI logical ports 1 In the Switch tab expand the Circuits node 2 Right click on the PVCs node and select Add on the popup menu as shown in Figure 10 1 The Add PVC dialog box Figure 10 3 appears Figure 10 3 Add PVC Dialog Box 3 Choose the Select button in the Endpoints field to define the circuit endpoints The Select Endpoints dialog box Figu...

Страница 428: ...or a Standard Circuit Configuration a Expand the Switches node select a switch and use the Cards or LPorts node to select Endpoint 1 b Repeat step a to select the name of the logical port for Endpoint 2 Note that if you enable the Select Layer2 VPN Customer View feature see page 13 8 only logical ports that belong to the VPN or customer you select appear in this list c Continue with step 5 For a F...

Страница 429: ...ect a switch and use the Cards or LPorts node to select Endpoint 1 The endpoints must be configured for PWE3 b Repeat step a to select the name of the logical port for Endpoint 2 c Continue with step 5 5 Verify the information in the Select Endpoints dialog box to ensure the correct endpoints have been selected 6 Choose OK to return to the Add PVC dialog box which now displays the information for ...

Страница 430: ...ables you to define cell delay variation CDV and cell loss ratio CLR in the forward and reverse direction See Traffic Management Attributes on page 10 31 NDC Defines CBX 500 and GX 550 Network Data Collection NDC functions which can detect any violation of PVC service subscription parameters and establish trends in network traffic patterns and loads See the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX ...

Страница 431: ...fault to activate the circuit at switch startup or Down if you do not want to activate the circuit at switch startup Circuit Type Specify whether the circuit is a VPC or VCC the default If you select VPC the VCI field is set to zero 0 and cannot be changed A VPC enables a network that interfaces with an OPTimum trunk to accept circuits with this VPI and any of its valid VCIs Endpoint 1 and Endpoin...

Страница 432: ...ing Templates to Define Circuits on page 10 92 for more information Note You create templates for standard PVCs and redirect PVCs in the same way However the template lists for redirect and traditional PVCs are maintained separately Admin Cost Threshold This feature determines the path of the PVC depending on the administrative cost threshold that you specify Enabled If you select the Enable check...

Страница 433: ... your network topology If a PVC typically traverses high speed trunks set the delay rate lower You need to increase the delay if the PVC uses low speed trunks Disabled default If you clear the Enable check box this field will be disabled Note For more information see the next section How PVC Routing Thresholds Interact With LPort Routing Metrics Network Overflow Determines how PVC traffic is manag...

Страница 434: ... case of primary endpoint failure If the primary endpoint recovers the backward switchover is triggered automatically to re establish the connection between the pivot and primary endpoints Note To implement redirect PVC with Revertive mode the entire network must be upgraded to the current network management and switch software release Path Trace Enable Path Trace Enable or disable the path trace ...

Страница 435: ... the logical port and enable the CDV or CTD threshold OSPF and VNN route the circuit on a path with the lowest CDV or CTD even if the circuit has a higher admin cost than other network paths CLR Enabled If you enable the CLR threshold the system does not override the originating node logical port routing metric Instead OSPF and Virtual Network Navigator VNN use the routing metric to route the circ...

Страница 436: ...mation about using ATM traffic descriptors see Chapter 12 Configuring ATM Traffic Descriptors Figure 10 5 Add PVC Traffic Type Tab Forward traffic is traffic from Endpoint 1 to Endpoint 2 and reverse traffic is traffic from Endpoint 2 to Endpoint 1 Complete the Traffic Type tab fields as described in Table 10 4 to set traffic type attributes in each direction Note If either port is not ATM CE you ...

Страница 437: ... As a result they assume the QoS class of the other direction Due to hardware restrictions you cannot dynamically modify the configured QoS class for ATM circuits with endpoints residing on BIO2 modules The NMS will not allow changes to the configured QoS for established BIO2 circuits To modify the QoS class for a BIO2 circuit endpoint delete the existing circuit and re configure it using the new ...

Страница 438: ...fy the SCR in cells per second for the combined high and low priority traffic that is the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream MBS CLP 0 cells Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes MBS CLP 0 If so specify the MBS in cells per second for the combined high priority traffic that is the CLP 0 cell stream MBS CLP 0 1 cells Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes MBS...

Страница 439: ...Select Traffic Shaper dialog box If this circuit carries ATM cell traffic use the default of None If this circuit carries frame relay traffic select one of the configured shapers These shapers correspond to the traffic shapers configured for the physical port on which this logical port resides For information about physical port traffic shaping see the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 350...

Страница 440: ...for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM PVCs About the PVC Tabs User Preference Attributes Select the User Preference tab from the Add PVC dialog box Figure 10 6 and complete the fields as described in Table 10 5 Figure 10 6 Add PVC User Preference Tab ...

Страница 441: ...heck box unchecked Immediately discards red packets Note For the ATM UNI DS3 E3 if you set this value for shaping purposes the switch code ignores the PCR SCR and MBS values calculated from the Add PVC Traffic Type tab Figure 10 12 on page 10 54 the switch instead picks the highest PCR queue available and sets the SCR to that PCR Red Frame Percent Forward Reverse ATM UNI endpoint on Frame based ca...

Страница 442: ...he frame discard attribute is only applicable to a CBX 500 with an FCP this attribute is offered as a selection on non CBX endpoints This is because even though one or both endpoints may not be on a CBX with FCP the PVC might traverse a CBX 500 FCP trunk In this case the provisioned attribute is used Note On ATM CE endpoint s the FCP Discard Fwd Rev option is not available Bandwidth Priority 0 15 ...

Страница 443: ...s enabled a non real time circuit that has been bumped remains in retry mode until sufficient bandwidth is available regardless of the Bumping Eligibility setting Disabled or Enabled See Appendix E Priority Routing for more information Restricted Priority Routing Select the check box default to provision new circuits at the lowest bandwidth priority regardless of configured higher bandwidth priori...

Страница 444: ...C function on all circuits For information about UPC traffic parameters see Chapter 12 Configuring ATM Traffic Descriptors To use the UPC function for individual circuits verify that the UPC function is enabled for both logical port endpoints on which you will define the circuit Enabling UPC at the circuit level has no effect if you did not enable UPC at the logical port level UPC is enabled by de...

Страница 445: ...iguration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 the FCP based EPD PPD function see Table 10 13 on page 10 61 takes precedence over the IOM output buffer EPD PPD function Select the Traffic Mgmt tab from the Add PVC dialog box Figure 10 7 and complete the fields as described in Table 10 6 Figure 10 7 Add PVC Traffic Mgmt Tab Note You should only enable frame discard if the traffic trave...

Страница 446: ...bled by default Selecting the check box will enable this option and the PVC will not be routed over a path whose total CDV exceeds the entered value If you enable this field and enter a value of 1000 µsec the PVC will not be routed over a path whose total CDV exceeds 1000 µsec The total CDV for a path is calculated by summing the CDV for each trunk in the route The valid range for this field is 1 ...

Страница 447: ...Accounting Server Administrator s Guide 3 Optional To manually define the circuit path for this circuit choose the Path tab See Manually Defining the Circuit Path on page 10 68 for more information 4 Optional To configure this PVC for a specific Layer2 VPN and customer see page 13 9 5 To add more PVCs repeat the steps in Defining a Point to Point Circuit Connection on page 10 13 6 When you finish ...

Страница 448: ...n or switchover of PVC traffic is triggered either manually or automatically The traffic then follows a path between the pivot and secondary endpoints Redirecting PVCs takes place only if the called endpoint is down Redirecting PVCs does not take place if the PVC segment within the Lucent network becomes inactive for example if there is no route to the primary endpoint or the trunk is down Note Yo...

Страница 449: ...ab expand the Circuits node 2 Right click on the Redirect PVCs node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Redirect PVC dialog box appears Figure 10 8 Figure 10 8 Add Redirect PVC Dialog Box 3 Choose the Select button in the Endpoints field to define the circuit endpoints The Select Endpoints dialog box Figure 10 9 on page 10 36 appears allowing you to set the pivot primary and secondary endp...

Страница 450: ...nts Dialog Box Redirect PVCs 4 Expand the node for the desired switch for the Pivot endpoint 5 Expand the LPorts class node under the switch 6 Select the desired LPort 7 Select the Primary and Secondary endpoints by repeating this procedure or by selecting an endpoint from a physical port 8 Choose OK to save these endpoint selections and return to the Add Redirect PVC dialog box ...

Страница 451: ...ed for Configuring Redirect PVC Parameters Circuit Type Tabs Required Frame Relay to Frame Relay Administrative Traffic Type User Preference Accounting Frame Relay to ATM on Cell Administrative Traffic Type User Preference NDC Accounting Frame Relay to ATM on Frame Administrative Traffic Type User Preference Accounting ATM on Cell to ATM on Cell Administrative Traffic Type User Preference Traffic ...

Страница 452: ...10 Add Redirect PVC Administrative Tab 2 Complete the fields in the Administrative tab as described in Table 10 3 on page 10 17 3 Complete the fields in the Traffic Type tab as described in Table 10 4 on page 10 23 4 Complete the fields in the User Preference tab as described in Table 10 5 on page 10 27 5 Complete the fields in the Traffic Mgmt tab as described in Table 10 6 on page 10 32 6 Contin...

Страница 453: ... in Defining Redirect PVCs on page 10 35 4 Choose OK to close the Add Redirect PVC dialog box and save the configuration Setting the Redirect PVC Delay Time You configure the Redirect PVC Delay Time on the Add Logical Port dialog box Figure 3 5 on page 3 8 or Figure 4 3 on page 4 21 for ATM UNI and NNI logical port types This option enables you to set the number of seconds to wait before the netwo...

Страница 454: ...etworks or end user devices This service uses a circuit with a Frame Relay logical port at one endpoint and an ATM logical port at the other endpoint The circuit uses a 10 bit address called a Data Link Connection Identifier DLCI DLCIs identify the logical endpoints of a virtual circuit and have local significance only ATM Data Exchange Interface Frame User to Network Interface DXI FUNI This servi...

Страница 455: ...B STDX 9000 Frame Relay cards In the B STDX or CBX switch that contains the frame relay user interface the card configured as the frame relay UNI endpoint must be one of the frame relay cards listed above The card that contains the other circuit endpoint may be a CBX or GX ATM card The interworking function is always performed on the frame relay card Configuring Link Management for the Frame Relay...

Страница 456: ...uired for network interworking PVCs LMI Profile ID This field on the FRF 5 tab of the Add PVC dialog box allows you to enable the selected LMI profile Selecting zero 0 the default value disables FRF 5 You enable the LMI profile on a per PVC basis instead of on a logical port basis The LMI profile is a temporary instance of LMI that runs across the ATM network interworking PVC and it defines the LM...

Страница 457: ...ould be a valid DLCI value in the range of 16 991 and 1022 For information about configuring the NNI DLCI field see FRF 5 Attributes on page 10 66 Counters N391 1 N392 3 N393 4 Timers T391 180 T392 200 LMI Protocol Q 933 Annex A Note The parameters listed above are hard coded for the LMI running on the NNI Network Interworking PVC The LMIs at both FR UNI DCE endpoints however do not have to be set...

Страница 458: ...mapping parameters see User Preference Attributes on page 10 60 EFCI FECN Mapping Parameters There are no user configurable parameters for EFCI and FECN mapping For ATM to Frame Relay Interworking PVCs EFCI is always mapped to FECN for Frame Relay to ATM Interworking PVCs EFCI is set to 0 zero For information about configuring EFCI FECN mapping see Table 10 13 on page 10 61 Note For ATM to Frame R...

Страница 459: ...size Bc Over the committed burst size but under the excess burst size Be Over the excess burst rate Color designators green amber and red identify packets travelling through the network Congested nodes use the designators to determine which frames to discard first under various congested states or congestion conditions Table 10 9 describes the designators traffic colors and discard policy Table 10...

Страница 460: ...mber of red frames the network is responsible for delivering The red frame percent Pr is determined as follows Graceful Discard is configured on the User Preferences tab See Table 10 13 on page 10 61 for field descriptions Rate Enforcement Schemes Rate enforcement schemes provide more flexibility increased rate enforcement accuracy and improved switch performance You configure the rate enforcement...

Страница 461: ...parameters on the screen You should use these values as a guideline in order to provision a PVC with roughly symmetric traffic parameters Optionally you can enter these converted values into the appropriate fields on the ATM endpoint or enter new ATM parameter values for the ATM endpoint The NMS uses the following formula to convert the entered Frame Relay traffic parameters IOH represents the Int...

Страница 462: ...or Network Interworking PVC Connections To define a circuit for Frame Relay to ATM service or network interworking 1 Follow step 1 through step 6 beginning on page 10 13 to select the PVC endpoints for Frame Relay to ATM service or network interworking 2 The Add PVC dialog box appears Figure 10 11 In this example the dialog box defines Frame Relay and ATM endpoints Figure 10 11 Add PVC Dialog Box ...

Страница 463: ...eport Generator User s Guide for more information Enter any unique alphanumeric name to identify the circuit Do not use parentheses and asterisks This name must be unique to the entire map Admin Status Select Up default to activate the circuit at switch startup or Down if you do not want to activate the circuit at switch startup VPI 0 nnnn Enter a value from zero 0 to nnnn to represent the VPI for...

Страница 464: ...ysical port See the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information For FRF 5 network interworking enter a value from 1 to nnn to represent the VCI for an ATM circuit Endpoint Connection ID DLCI Frame Relay endpoint Enter a unique DLCI for this logical port Management Circuit If you select this check box this PVC configuration will be included in ...

Страница 465: ...ting Thresholds Interact With LPort Routing Metrics End End Delay Threshold cell transfer delay This feature determines the path of the PVC depending on the end end delay threshold that you specify Enabled Select the Enable check box so the PVC will not be routed over a path whose total end to end delay exceeds the entered value This means that if you enable this field and enter a value of 500 µse...

Страница 466: ...on Enable or disable the removal of this circuit after the path trace is complete Selec the check box for the circuit to be deleted from the switch after the specified path trace timeout period Path trace information for this circuit will also be made available for the timeout period If you wish for the circuit to remain clear the check box default If this field is enabled the circuit will not be ...

Страница 467: ... tab fields complete the attributes following sections Traffic Type Attributes on page 10 54 User Preference Attributes on page 10 60 FRF 5 Attributes on page 10 66 Path Trace Timeout sec 1 65535 Enter the number of seconds 0 65535 for which you want the trace results to be maintained in the switch The default is ten minutes 600 seconds Table 10 11 Add PVC Administrative Tab Fields FR ATM Continue...

Страница 468: ...everse traffic In the example shown in Figure 10 12 configure the fields beneath Forward Endpoint 1 Endpoint 2 then configure the fields beneath Reverse Endpoint 2 Endpoint 1 The attributes that appear depend upon the endpoint type either Frame Relay or ATM Figure 10 12 Add PVC Traffic Type Tab FR ATM Note You must configure Traffic Type attributes before choosing OK in the Add PVC dialog box to s...

Страница 469: ...CPE compensates for any delay or lost cell traffic Choose this option if the PVC will traverse a CBX 500 cloud that uses an FCP Priority Forward Reverse Select both the forward and reverse circuit priorities from the pull down list where 1 is high priority 2 is medium priority and 3 is low priority The forward and reverse circuit priority values do not have to match Traffic Descriptor Zero CIR For...

Страница 470: ...is disabled on the ATM side of the circuit and MBS is forced to equal 32 PCR cells sec Displays the PCR that is calculated from the Be value you enter Rate Enf Scheme Select Simple default or Jump The configurable rate enforcement scheme provides more flexibility increased rate enforcement accuracy and improved switch performance See Rate Enforcement Schemes on page 10 46 for more information Delt...

Страница 471: ...etermines which TDs you can select For more information on QoS classes see Table 12 1 on page 12 3 Note For a CBX 500 that uses the FCP RM cells are sent in the backward direction As a result they assume the QoS class of the other direction Priority Fwd Rev VBR NRT and VBR RT QoS classes on CBX GX only Select both the forward and reverse circuit priority where 1 is the highest priority and 4 is th...

Страница 472: ...CR CLP 0 1 If so specify the SCR in CPS for the combined high and low priority traffic that is the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream MBS CLP 0 cells Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes MBS CLP 0 If so specify the MBS in CPS for the combined high priority traffic that is the CLP 0 cell stream MBS CLP 0 1 cells Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes MBS CLP...

Страница 473: ...d shapers in the Select Traffic Shaper dialog box If this circuit carries ATM cell traffic use the default of none If this circuit carries frame relay traffic select one of the configured shapers These shapers correspond to the traffic shapers configured for the physical port on which this logical port resides For information about physical port traffic shaping see the Switch Module Configuration ...

Страница 474: ...GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM PVCs Configuring Frame Relay to ATM Interworking Circuits User Preference Attributes Select the User Preference tab in the Add PVC dialog box Figure 10 13 and complete the fields as described in Table 10 13 Figure 10 13 Add PVC User Preference Tab FR ATM ...

Страница 475: ...ere is no congestion Check box cleared Immediately discards red packets Note For the ATM UNI DS3 E3 if you set this value for shaping purposes the switch software ignores the PCR SCR and MBS values calculated from the Add PVC Traffic Type tab Figure 10 12 on page 10 54 the switch instead picks the highest PCR queue available and sets the SCR to that PCR Red Frame Percent Forward Reverse PVCs with ...

Страница 476: ...his is because even though one or both endpoints may not be on a CBX with FCP the PVC might traverse a CBX 500 FCP trunk In this case the provisioned attribute is used Bandwidth Priority 0 15 Specify a value from zero 0 through 15 where zero 0 is the default and indicates the highest priority See Appendix E Priority Routing for more information CDV Tolerance 1 65535 microsec PVCs with CBX GX and 1...

Страница 477: ...rt T1 E1 module endpoints only Select the check box to allow this circuit to generate OAM alarms to indicate whether the circuit is up or down These alarms send a signal to the logical port whenever the circuit goes down or comes back up Uncheck the box to disable OAM alarms on this circuit UPC Function PVCs with ATM endpoints only Enables default or disables the usage parameter control UPC functi...

Страница 478: ... on endpoint 2 RFC 1483 1490 This option is the default if you have an ATM logical port on endpoint 1 and a Frame Relay logical port on endpoint 2 Cell Loss Priority ATM endpoint only Specify the CLP setting The CLP bit is in each cell s header Options include 0 Sets the CLP bit to zero 0 1 Sets the CLP bit to 1 fr de 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 and 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 modules only Sets the CLP bi...

Страница 479: ... ATM endpoint only Select one of the following options 0 Ignores EFCI to FECN bit mapping fr fecn default Maps the EFCI bit on the ATM endpoint to the frame relay FECN bit Note For FRF 5 EFCI is always mapped to FECN for ATM to Frame Relay Interworking PVCs EFCI is set to zero 0 for Frame Relay to ATM Interworking PVCs Table 10 13 Add PVC User Preference Tab Fields Continued Field Action Descripti...

Страница 480: ...efault value 0 which disables FRF 5 For a network interworking PVC FRF 5 select 1 to enable the LMI profile for the circuit and then enter the NNI DLCI value Note The LMI profile for the network interworking PVC is configured on a per PVC basis using Q 933 Annex A as the LMI protocol However when you configure the Frame Relay logical port endpoint for this circuit the link management protocol can ...

Страница 481: ...uring a PWE3 Circuit on page 9 64 for more information 5 Optional To manually define the circuit path for this circuit select the Path tab See Manually Defining the Circuit Path on page 10 68 for more information 6 Optional To configure this PVC for a specific VPN and customer see Configuring a PVC for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 9 7 Choose OK to close the Add PVC dialog box NNI DLCI If you enable an L...

Страница 482: ...Lucent Networks PNNI If the alternate path option is defined and a circuit failure occurs in the manually defined circuit path the circuit can be routed based on VNN or PNNI information provided To manually define the circuit path 1 Add a new PVC or modify an existing PVC using the instructions in Defining a Point to Point Circuit Connection on page 10 13 2 In the Add Modify PVC dialog box select ...

Страница 483: ... From Switch field displays a listing of hops trunk switch pairs in the defined path 4 Define the path using the Trunks and Next Switch fields selecting trunk switch pairs from the list of available hops to include the hop in the circuit path and choose Add To Path When there are multiple trunks between two switches select Any Trunk and the next switch to route the circuit based on OSPF 5 Click th...

Страница 484: ...e path is complete 10 Choose OK in the Define Path dialog box when you have defined the path The Add PVC dialog box appears 11 Select the Path tab 12 Select enable or clear disable the Use Defined Path check box to specify whether to use the defined path or to enable the network routing to specify the circuit path Enabled check box selected Routes the circuit based on the manually defined route Di...

Страница 485: ...e Circuits class node from the switch or from an LPort instance node When you create a PMP PVC Root from an LPort instance node the selected LPort is automatically set as the PMP PVC Root Endpoint The following steps describe the process for creating a new PMP PVC root 1 Opening the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Root Dialog Box on page 10 71 2 Selecting a PMP PVC Root Endpoint on page 10 72 3 Config...

Страница 486: ...PVC Root Dialog Box 4 To add a PMP PVC root continue with Selecting a PMP PVC Root Endpoint If you are creating a PMP PVC Root from an LPort instance node you do not need to select an endpoint Continue with Configuring PMP PVC Root Parameters on page 10 76 Selecting a PMP PVC Root Endpoint To select a PMP PVC root endpoint 1 In the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Root dialog box choose the Select butt...

Страница 487: ...ration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 0510 73 Figure 10 19 Select Endpoint Dialog Box 2 Select the PMP root endpoint by using either of the following procedures Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch on page 10 74 Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port on page 10 75 ...

Страница 488: ... Endpoint From a Switch To select an endpoint from a switch 1 In the Select Endpoint dialog box expand the node for the desired switch for the Endpoint see Figure 10 20 Figure 10 20 Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch 2 Expand the LPorts class node under the switch and select the desired LPort 3 Choose OK and continue with Configuring PMP PVC Root Parameters on page 10 76 ...

Страница 489: ...elect Endpoint dialog box expand the node for the desired switch for the endpoint see Figure 10 21 Figure 10 21 Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port 2 Expand the Cards class node 3 Expand the node for the desired card 4 Expand the PPorts class node 5 Expand the node for the desired physical port 6 Expand the LPorts or subports class node 7 Select the desired LPort 8 Choose OK and continue wi...

Страница 490: ... a PMP PVC root you must select the PMP PVC root endpoint If you are creating a PMP PVC root from an LPort instance node you do not need to select an endpoint Continue with step 1 below See the following for instructions on selecting PMP PVC endpoints Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch on page 10 74 Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port on page 10 75 To configure PMP PVC root parameters 1 In...

Страница 491: ...ise with any attached non Lucent equipment See page 10 9 for information about setting this value CDV Tolerance 1 65535 microsec Enter a value between 1 65535 µsec to define the CDVT The UPC uses this value to police the requested TD The default is 600 µsec Note If you are using the CBX 500 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM or the CBX 3500 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 Enhanced IMA module the recommende...

Страница 492: ... Mechanisms on page 5 18 for more information Reroute Balancing When enabled circuits use the tuning parameters you defined for the switch When disabled switch tuning parameters are ignored for the circuit For more information see the Navis EMS CBGX Getting Started Guide Table 10 16 Add Point to Multipoint PVC Root Traffic Type Tab Fields Field Action Description QoS Class Select one of the follow...

Страница 493: ... if you selected a TD combination that includes SCR CLP 0 1 If so specify the SCR in CPS for the combined high and low priority traffic that is the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream MBS CLP 0 cells Displays only if you selected a traffic descriptor combination that includes MBS CLP 0 If so specify the MBS in cells per second for the combined high priority traffic that is the CLP 0 cell stream MBS CLP ...

Страница 494: ...lose the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Root dialog box After you configure a PMP root complete the following steps to dedicate it to a VPN 1 In the switch object tree tab in the Navigation Panel expand the circuits class node and double click on the PMP Roots class node for which you want to choose a VPN 2 Select a PMP Root from the list then right click on it 3 From the pop up menu choose L2 VPN Cu...

Страница 495: ...scribe the process for creating a new point to multipoint PMP PVC leaf 1 Opening the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf Dialog Box on page 10 81 2 Selecting a PMP PVC Leaf Endpoint on page 10 83 3 Configuring PMP PVC Leaf Parameters on page 10 83 Opening the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf Dialog Box To open the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf dialog box 1 Expand the Circuits class node 2 Expand t...

Страница 496: ... Configuring PMP Circuits Figure 10 25 Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf Dialog Box 6 To add a PMP PVC leaf continue with Selecting a PMP PVC Leaf Endpoint on page 10 83 7 If you are creating a PMP PVC Root from an LPort instance node you do not need to select an endpoint Continue with Configuring PMP PVC Leaf Parameters on page 10 83 ...

Страница 497: ...m a Switch on page 10 74 Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port on page 10 75 3 Continue with Configuring PMP PVC Leaf Parameters Configuring PMP PVC Leaf Parameters To configure PMP PVC leaf parameters you enter information in each of the following tabs categorized by parameter type Administrative Accounting Before You Begin Before you configure the parameters for a PMP leaf you must select t...

Страница 498: ...oint PVC Leaf dialog box select the Accounting tab Figure 10 27 on page 10 85 Table 10 17 Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf Administrative Tab Fields Field Action Description Admin Status Set the Admin Status to Up if you want to activate this circuit when the switch comes online Set the Admin Status to Down if you do not want to activate this circuit when the switch comes online VPI 0 255 VCI 1 10...

Страница 499: ... the 5 digit Carrier ID This number uniquely identifies the carrier at each end of the network interface If you have not yet configured accounting at the LPort level this field is zero 0 Recording Interface ID Read only field that contains the 16 digit PVC Recording Interface ID made up of the 12 digit IP address and the LPort interface number no dots and padded with zeros to fill all 12 digits Fo...

Страница 500: ...ge data collection when PVC Accounting is set to Enabled at the switch and port levels If you select either or both cell counting fields the resulting accounting records contain both time based and usage based measurements If you clear the check box for Ingress or Egress Cell Counting cell counts from this circuit are not included in PVC usage data collection If you do not select either cell count...

Страница 501: ...t and can occur at the port level Figure 10 28 PMP Circuit Example Three OPTimum trunks configured on one physical port Leaf 1 Leaf 2 Leaf 3 This configuration is not completely successful Data can only be sent over one of the defined leafs This configuration is valid Data can be sent over all three leafs because each leaf is configured on its own physical port Root Root Leaf 1 Leaf 2 Leaf 3 Three...

Страница 502: ... desired PMP leaf 5 Perform one of the following Select Delete from the Actions menu Choose the Delete button from the toolbar Right click on the PMP Leaf and select Delete from the pop up menu A prompt asks if you are sure you want to delete the selected item 6 Choose OK Deleting a PMP PVC Root To delete a PMP PVC root 1 Expand the Circuits class node 2 Expand the PMP Roots class node and select ...

Страница 503: ...t that is currently in use traffic may be lost You cannot move a circuit for which you have manually defined a circuit path The VPI VCI must be unique to the destination logical port The Move Circuit function fails if the number of circuits moved exceeds the maximum allowed for the IOM You can not move a circuit with one endpoint defined with SNB Navis EMS CBGX will display the error message Canno...

Страница 504: ...50 and B STDX 9000 Configuring ATM PVCs Moving Circuits The Move Circuit Endpoint dialog box Figure 10 30 appears Figure 10 30 Move Circuit Endpoint Dialog Box 4 To select a PVC endpoint to move click on the Select button in the Endpoints field The Select Endpoints dialog box Figure 10 31 appears ...

Страница 505: ... reflects the old source logical port endpoint and the right hand side of the dialog box reflects the new destination logical port endpoint 6 Select the new endpoint by repeating this procedure or select an endpoint from a physical port 7 Choose OK when you have selected the logical ports 8 To complete the circuit endpoint move select the circuits to be moved in the Move Circuit Endpoint dialog bo...

Страница 506: ...e and select Add PVC using this Template from the pop up menu as shown in Figure 10 32 This menu option will display only if the Is Template box is checked in the Administrative tab for the PVC Figure 10 32 Adding a PVC Based on a Template The Add PVC dialog box Figure 10 3 on page 10 13 appears with the same values as the selected template PVC except for Name Alias and other values that are requi...

Страница 507: ...ath This connection sets up the link to send and receive management protocol requests and responses To make this connection you must know the IP address of the NMS The NMS path configuration is node specific and describes each NMS that attaches via the switch You only need to define an NMS path for the switch that contains one of the following management connection elements Management PVC MPVC You...

Страница 508: ...You configure an Autonomous System External ASE mask to connect to an external device or an IP network of external devices to enable management VCs to traverse Virtual Network Navigator VNN areas Management SPVC MSPVC CBX and GX only You can use this type of connection to connect the switch management port to an SVC terminating address located on an adjacent switch This management connection is us...

Страница 509: ... SW switchname It uses an interface number ifnum of 4093 To form the circuit connect the MgmtLPort SW switchname endpoint to any UNI logical port type You can configure MPVCs across different switch platforms for example B STDX Frame Relay UNI to CBX MPVC Configure the remaining PVC attributes as you would for a standard PVC Note that you can use the internal management port to terminate more than...

Страница 510: ...000 for more information 2 Define an ATM UNI or NNI logical port See Working With ATM Logical Ports on page 3 2 for more information Defining a Standard MPVC Connection 1 Open the object tree for a switch 2 In the Network object tree expand the instance node for the network that contains the switch see Figure 3 4 on page 3 5 3 Expand the LPorts class node and expand the instance node for the manag...

Страница 511: ...re 11 2 Add PVC Dialog Box MPVC 6 In the Add PVC dialog box choose the Select button in the Endpoints field The Select Endpoints dialog box will display with the management LPort selected as Endpoint 1 7 Select the name of the switch where Endpoint 2 resides 8 Select the name of the logical port for Endpoint 2 9 Choose OK to return to the Add PVC dialog box ...

Страница 512: ...avisXtend Accounting Server parameters for this circuit select the Accounting tab For more information see the NavisXtend Accounting Server Administrator s Guide 15 Choose OK to define the circuit parameters 16 Continue with Completing the Management Configuration on page 11 15 to define the NMS path and static route Table 11 1 Configuring Standard MPVC Attributes For an ATM Service PVC see For an...

Страница 513: ...ss node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add PVC dialog box appears Figure 11 2 on page 11 5 6 Enter the VPI VCI or DLCI values as follows For an ATM UNI endpoint enter a VPI and VCI value See About the PVC Tabs on page 10 16 for descriptions of these fields For a Frame Relay UNI endpoint enter a DLCI value See page 10 67 for a description of this field 7 Enter a Circuit Name for the redire...

Страница 514: ...For more information see the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 10 Optional To configure NavisXtend Accounting Server parameters for this circuit choose the Accounting tab For more information see the NavisXtend Accounting Server Administrator s Guide 11 Choose OK to define the circuit parameters 12 Continue with Completing the Management Configuration on p...

Страница 515: ...t endpoint and define the physical port attributes See the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information 2 Define an ATM UNI or NNI logical port See Working With ATM Logical Ports on page 3 2 for more information Defining the Management VPI VCI Connection 1 For an LPort for which you want to add a Management VPI VCI expand the LPort instance nod...

Страница 516: ...sses internal network management functions The MSPVC internal logical port is designated as MgmtLPort SW switch name It uses an interface number ifnum of 4093 To form the MSPVC connect the MgmtLPort SW switch name endpoint to any target ATM End System Address AESA configured on an ATM UNI logical port Table 11 3 Add Management VPI VCI Dialog Box Fields Field Action Description Mgmt Connection Name...

Страница 517: ...t station is located is a standard SPVC This means the VC can traverse any combination of Lucent CBX and GX switches and other vendor equipment that is capable of supporting PNNI SPVCs Configuring MSPVCs The following section describes how to define an SVC port address and configure the MSPVC connection Before you configure an MSPVC 1 Select the switch for which you want to configure the ATM UNI o...

Страница 518: ... class node 3 Select the Offnet Circuits class node and perform one of the following Select Add from the Actions menu Choose the Add button from the toolbar Right click the Offnet Circuits class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Offnet Circuit dialog box appears Figure 11 4 Figure 11 4 Add Offnet Circuit Dialog Box 4 In the Add Offnet Circuit dialog box choose the Select button in t...

Страница 519: ...plete this configuration select the destination Port Address from a switch displayed in the SVC Address tab Or choose the Create Address tab to select or create a Terminating Endpoint If you know the offnet circuit terminating endpoint address use Table 18 3 on page 18 9 to select the address format and configure the terminating endpoint address For more information on AESA formats see page 16 2 I...

Страница 520: ...e tab to set the TDs for this offnet circuit See Defining TD Attributes on page 12 11 for instructions on configuring these attributes 10 Choose the User Preference tab to set the user preferences for this offnet circuit See User Preference Attributes on page 10 60 for instructions on configuring these attributes 11 Choose OK to create the new offnet circuit 12 Continue with the next section Compl...

Страница 521: ... node for the switch you want to add NMS paths to 3 Right click on the NMS Paths node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add NMS path dialog box appears Figure 11 6 Add NMS path Dialog Box 4 Complete the steps in one of the following three sections then continue with step 5 on page 11 16 For Standard or Redirect MPVCs a Enter the Management IP Address This is the NMS IP address of the SPARCst...

Страница 522: ...a Enter the Management IP Address This is the NMS IP address of the SPARCstation to which this switch connects b Select Management SPVC from the pull down list in the Access Path field c Choose the Select button to select the MSPVC Name 5 Select the ASE Advertise check box to enable default advertising of the new NMS management path on the network Clear the check box if you do not want to advertis...

Страница 523: ...vered While the network can still deliver data that exceeds the limits of this traffic contract this data may be delayed or lost if network resources are unavailable When you configure a PVC you select the desired ATM TD and enter the appropriate parameter value based on those items provided in the menu selection list When you configure an SPVC you first configure the specific TD and then assign t...

Страница 524: ...nnels follow these guidelines For control channels between two Lucent switches which encompasses the trunk signaling control channel and the node to node management traffic control channel the TD values PCR SCR MBS are only used to calculate the amount of bandwidth reserved by the Connection Admission Control CAC for this type of traffic The TD values do not affect traffic shaping on these channel...

Страница 525: ...ed voice that is represented by a continuous bit stream CBR traffic requires guaranteed throughput rates and service levels Note The CBR QoS class is not available on management PVCs MPVCs 1 Variable bit rate real time VBR RT For packaging special delay sensitive applications such as packet video that require low cell delay variation CDV between endpoints 2 Variable bit rate non real time VBR NRT ...

Страница 526: ...orted physical bandwidth This ability to oversubscribe a logical port s bandwidth assumes that not all network resources are in use at the same time For more information about the oversubscription factor see page 2 19 About Traffic Parameters This section describes network traffic parameters and their associated ATM TD combinations When you create a logical port PVC or an SPVC you can select a TD ...

Страница 527: ... UBR ABR traffic MBS Maximum burst size is the maximum number of cells that can be received at the PCR This allows a burst of cells to arrive at a rate higher than the SCR If the burst is larger than anticipated the additional cells are either tagged or dropped This parameter applies only to VBR traffic it does not apply to the CBR or UBR traffic MCR CBX 500 with FCP support only Minimum cell rate...

Страница 528: ...f the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream as well as the SCR and MBS of the CLP 0 cell stream with no Tagging PCR CLP 0 1 SCR CLP 0 1 MBS CLP 0 1 no tagging Traffic conformance is based on the PCR SCR and MBS of the CLP 0 1 cell stream with no Tagging UBR specified unspecified PCR CLP 0 1 no best effort Traffic conformance is based only on the PCR of the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream with no Best Effort...

Страница 529: ...ristics The UPC and NPC functions use the traffic parameters to determine the conforming cells of an ATM connection based on the threshold values for PCR SCR and MBS as specified in the service contract If a TD combination is not valid for the service class specified in the Forward or Reverse QoS class field you cannot select it For more information on how each TD combination affects the cell stre...

Страница 530: ... Control Channel feature enables you to define TDs for control circuits To do this you configure TD information for the logical port s ILMI UNI and PNNI signaling or trunk control channels To configure ATM TDs Continue with the following section to define network wide TDs See Defining TD Attributes on page 12 11 to specify TDs for an existing logical port or SPVC Defining Network wide TDs To confi...

Страница 531: ...values in CPS Table 12 4 TD Types TD Type Description PCR CLP 0 cells sec Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes PCR CLP 0 If so specify the PCR in cells per second for high priority traffic that is the CLP 0 cell stream PCR CLP 0 1 cells sec Specify the PCR in CPS for combined high and low priority traffic that is the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream SCR CLP 0 cells sec Display...

Страница 532: ...s sec Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes MBS CLP 0 1 If so specify the MBS in CPS for combined high and low priority traffic that is the CLP 0 1 cell stream MCR CLP 0 cells sec Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes MCR CLP 0 If so specify the MCR in CPS for combined high priority traffic that is the CLP 0 cell stream Table 12 4 TD Types Continued TD...

Страница 533: ...ct OPTimum trunk logical ports see Traffic Descriptor Attributes on page 3 41 For SPVCs see Traffic Type Attributes on page 18 15 For PNNI routing control channel RCC see Configuring an ATM NNI Logical Port on page 21 50 Figure 12 3 shows an example of defined TDs and fields Figure 12 3 ILMI Forward Traffic Descriptor Dialog Box 2 Select a traffic descriptor name from the Name field for either the...

Страница 534: ...ing ATM TDs Deleting TD Definitions To delete a TD definition for either a logical port or SPVC 1 Expand the instance node for the network to which you want to delete a TD 2 Expand the Traffic Descriptors class node 3 Right click on the name of the TD listed in the navigation panel and choose Delete from the pop up menu Figure 12 4 Figure 12 4 Deleting a TD ...

Страница 535: ...ol Channel TD Defaults DS1 E1 E3 DS3 OC 3c STM1 OC 12c STM4 Type NoClpScra a The default Type NoClpScr represents the following PCR CLP 0 1 SCR CLP 0 1 MBS CLP 0 1 NoClpScr NoClpScr NoClpScr NoClpScr NoClpScr Class VBR NRT VBR NRT VBR NRT VBR NRT VBR NRT VBR NRT PCRb CPS b If the configured logical port bandwidth is less than the physical port bandwidth then PCR is 100 of logical port bandwidth 35...

Страница 536: ...BR NRT VBR NRT PCRb CPS b If the configured logical port bandwidth is less than the physical port bandwidth then PCR is 100 of logical port bandwidth 3500 4700 13500 13500 13500 CBX 56000 GX 13500 CBX 56000 GX SCR CPS 21 21 250 250 1000 4000 MBS cells 16 16 16 16 16 16 Approximate EBWc CPS c The approximate equivalent bandwidth EBW values are based on the use of the default values with the Lucent ...

Страница 537: ... For CBX IOMs this is 13500 CPS for GX BIOs this is 56000 CPS b For OC 3c STM1 and OC 12c STM4 the default values are associated with the maximum control channel transmission rate the card type supports For CBX IOMs this is 13500cps for GX BIOs this is 56000 c The default type NoClpNoScr represents the following PCR CLP 0 1 d If the configured logical port bandwidth is less than the physical port ...

Страница 538: ...ass VBR NRT PCR 906 CPS SCR 453 CPS MBS 171 cells EBW a a The approximate equivalent bandwidth EBW values are based on the use of the default values with the Lucent CAC in absence of user circuits on the logical port It is provided here only as an aid to determine how much total bandwidth is reserved for the control channel The amount reserved changes if you modify the TD class or value 645 Note P...

Страница 539: ...2 VPN enables you to provide dedicated bandwidth to the customer When you configure a trunk you can dedicate it to a specific VPN and if desired allow customers to monitor their own networks However switch control and configuration stays with you as the network provider Layer 2 VPNs support PNNI links See Layer 2 VPNs Over PNNI on page 13 10 for more information Policy based routing is supported o...

Страница 540: ...s however inherit the VPN customer associations of the host logical port When you configure the logical port or PVC you also set the Net Overflow attribute This attribute specifies whether PVCs or SVCs are restricted to trunks of their own Layer 2 VPN or can use public shared trunks during outages Customers that operate in restrictive mode need to purchase redundant trunks Figure 13 1 provides a r...

Страница 541: ...art of the network Trunks that have non zero VPNs are reserved for data traffic matching that VPN although they can also carry management traffic for the entire network Figure 13 2 Layer 2 VPN Inclusive Mode Example Action Action Customer A Customer B Customer A Customer B Customer D Customer D Customer C Customer C Customer B Customer A Create VPN D and associate Customer D Configure PVC for VPN ...

Страница 542: ...ialog box appears Figure 13 3 Figure 13 3 Add VPN Dialog Box 3 Select the General tab and complete the fields as described in Table 13 1 Step 1 Create the Layer 2 VPN see page 13 4 Step 2 Add customers to a specific Layer 2 VPN see page 13 5 Step 3 Dedicate a trunk to a specific Layer 2 VPN see page 7 23 Step 4 For SVC traffic when you configure the UNI or NNI logical port specify the Network Over...

Страница 543: ...his VPN Set PNNI Policy Routing Attributes Select the check box to specify the PNNI policy routing attributes Clear the check box if you do not wish to set PNNI policy routing attributes Ne NSC 1 65535 Enter a number to identify the policy Network Entity Network Service Category Ne NSC to be advertised for this VPN Rp NSC 1 65535 Enter a number to identify the Resource Partition Network Service Ca...

Страница 544: ...e OK to add the VNN Customer The Add Customer dialog box closes Table 13 2 Add Customer Dialog Box Fields Field Action Description Name Enter a customer name Customer ID Assign a value from 1 to 65535 Phone Optional Enter the customer s phone number Contact Information Optional Enter the customer s contact information Comments Optional Enter any comments about this customer VPN Name Select the VPN...

Страница 545: ...icted to trunks of their own VPN or whether SVCs can use public shared trunks during overflow conditions Once you configure a logical port use the following steps to dedicate it to a VPN and customer name 1 Right click on the instance node of the LPort to which you want to assign a Layer 2 VPN and customer name 2 Select L2 VPN Customer Info from the pop up menu The Choose VPN Policy dialog box app...

Страница 546: ...og box only displays the logical ports that belong to the customer you selected See Using the Layer2 Customer VPN View Feature on page H 4 for information on using this feature As you configure logical ports use the instructions in Configuring a Logical Port for Layer 2 VPN on page 13 7 to assign the port to a VPN or customer Note To give a customer the ability to monitor network resources without...

Страница 547: ...unks of its own Layer 2 VPN or can use public shared trunks during overflow conditions After you configure a PVC use the following steps to dedicate it to a VPN 1 Right click on the instance node of the PVC to which you want to assign a Layer 2 VPN and customer name 2 Select L2 VPN Customer Info from the pop up menu The Choose VPN Policy dialog box appears see Figure 13 5 on page 13 7 3 In the Cus...

Страница 548: ... assigned to a particular VPN Layer 2 VPNs over PNNI are supported within peer groups and on border trunks and will function in a multi level PNNI domain If there are multiple border nodes PNNI routing will give preference to the border node that belongs to a particular VPN unless no other VPNs exist In that case the border nodes in the public VPN will be selected Similarly if there are multiple p...

Страница 549: ...n also configure the CBX 500 switch or GX 550 Multiservice WAN switch physical port on which a UNI logical port resides for Automatic Protection Switching APS The APS with resilient UNI configuration protects against facility defects and equipment failure as well as input output module IOM failure Keep in mind that this feature requires a circuit reroute Although you can configure manually activat...

Страница 550: ...ame that will be bound to the primary port see page 14 4 Step 3 Configure circuits to use the Service Name as an endpoint see page 10 14 Note that both endpoints can be different Service Names Step 4 Define one or more backup logical ports of the same type as the primary logical port When defining General Attributes for the backup logical port select the check box for the Backup Service Name field...

Страница 551: ...efit from this feature through the public Lucent based ATM network or by combining their private Lucent switches with services provided by their public carrier Creating a Backup Port To create a backup port first define a UNI DCE or DTE logical port and select the Backup Service Name check box see Table 3 3 on page 3 21 When a backup port is not in use the port is idle and does not use network res...

Страница 552: ...port A circuit recognizes its service endpoint by this name instead of the logical port name To create the Service Name bindings 1 Expand the instance node of the LPort for which you want to create a service name The Service Names class node appears under the LPort instance node 2 Right click on the Service Names class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Service Name dialog box appear...

Страница 553: ...er a brief comment or description of the service Backup Binding Displays the status of the service name binding Enabled Primary Binding box Select this check box to make the primary port the active endpoint for the circuit Clear this check box if you want to make a backup LPort the active endpoint for the circuit Primary LPort Information The fields in this area identify the primary LPort paramete...

Страница 554: ...rimary port are rerouted to the backup port To activate a backup LPort for a service name 1 Expand the instance node of the LPort where the service name binding is located The Service Names class node appears under the LPort instance node 2 Expand the class node for the Service Names 3 Right click on the service name you want to activate and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Service Na...

Страница 555: ...ort by expanding the appropriate switch node and its subnodes 7 Select an LPort Name that has the same logical port type as the port you need to back up 8 Choose OK The Select Backup LPort dialog box closes The Modify Service Name dialog box displays the backup LPort values in the Backup LPort Information field Figure 14 4 Note Make sure that the Can Backup Service Names field displays Yes This in...

Страница 556: ...t PVCs Activating a Backup Binding Port Figure 14 4 Modify Service Name Dialog Box Containing Backup LPort Information 9 Verify that the Can Backup Service subfield in the Backup LPort Information field displays Yes If this field displays No you cannot use this LPort as a backup LPort 10 Choose OK The Modify Service Name dialog box closes ...

Страница 557: ...odule Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for a listing of the minimum software and hardware versions that support the various APS options APS allows you to protect optical interfaces by provisioning a backup protection port that automatically takes over for the primary working port when a physical layer fault or module failure occurs You can configure APS resilient UNI...

Страница 558: ...nsiderations When you select APS resilient UNI on a CBX 3500 or CBX 500 you configure the working and protection port on different interface modules GX 550 Considerations When you select APS resilient UNI on a GX 550 you can configure the working and protection ports on either the same module BIO or Phy or a different module BIO or Phy APS Resilient UNI Over PNNI You can use the APS resilient UNI ...

Страница 559: ...ttributes One or more protection ports which are on the same switches as the working ports and their APS resilient UNI attributes For more information see the Switch Module Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Defining ATM UNI Logical Ports on the Working Ports To configure an ATM UNI logical port on an APS working port 1 Select the switch on which the first working port...

Страница 560: ... the PPort subport channel card MLFR type LPort or IMA group to which you want to add an LPort The LPorts class node appears under the PPort or subport instance node 3 Right click on the LPorts class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Logical Port dialog box appears Figure 3 5 on page 3 8 4 Repeat step 4 through step 6 in the previous section titled Defining ATM UNI Logical Ports on ...

Страница 561: ...endpoint to the protection backup port Use the following instructions to define the APS fault tolerant PVC resilient UNI configuration between two working ports 1 Complete the steps described in Creating Service Names on page 14 4 to assign a Service Name to one of the working ATM UNI logical port endpoints A different Service Name must be used if backing up the working APS port on the other side ...

Страница 562: ...Beta Draft Confidential 14 141 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring Fault tolerant PVCs Configuring APS Resilient UNI ...

Страница 563: ...port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 and 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 cards An RLMI preferred backup pair can be a combination of any two Frame Relay UNI NNI physical links For example a preferred Universal Input Output UIO V 35 and a backup T1 In addition the ATM Network Interworking for Frame Relay NNI logical port is supported on the B STDX 1 port ATM CS DS3 E3 and 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 cards Each RLMI prefer...

Страница 564: ...ng a pair of Frame Relay UNI or NNI logical ports configured on a B STDX or CBX switch to serve as preferred and backup ports If the primary port fails a switchover to the backup port occurs The RLMI feature requires one end of the RLMI pair to be configured as Master controls the automatic switchover and the other end to be configured as Slave Lucent switches can operate as Master or Slave Bay Ne...

Страница 565: ...e If the Master RLMI switch s RLMI mode is configured as Full Revertive the following occurs When the preferred link goes down the backup link becomes the working link If or when the preferred link comes back up the working link automatically switches back to the preferred link Semi Revertive If the Master RLMI switch s RLMI mode is configured as Semi Revertive the following occurs When the prefer...

Страница 566: ...rt ATM CS DS3 E3 and 1 port ATM IWU OC 3c STM 1 cards Each RLMI preferred backup pair is configured independently from other pairs You must configure the UNI DTE as the Master and the UNI DCE as the Slave You can configure the NNI as Master or Slave one side must be Master and the other side must be Slave You must define both preferred and backup logical ports for an RLMI name You select these por...

Страница 567: ...erred port and backup port pair see Creating Service Names on page 15 5 3 Configure the RLMI switchover mode see Configuring the RLMI Switchover Mode on page 15 9 4 Add a circuit connection as described in Defining a Point to Point Circuit Connection on page 10 13 and configure the RLMI service name as Endpoint 1 or Endpoint 2 see For a RLMI PVC Connection on page 10 15 Creating Service Names The ...

Страница 568: ...Expand the node for the logical port for which you want to create a service name You can create RLMI service names only on DTE or NNI logical ports configured with RLMI enabled and the Can Backup Service Names field set to No 3 Right click on the Service Names node and click Add on the pop up menu as shown in Figure 15 1 Figure 15 1 Adding a Service Name ...

Страница 569: ...e Mode field selecting the mode of operation for resilient LMI bindings from the pull down list The RLMI feature does not detect invalid Master Master or Slave Slave configurations You must configure complementary types for example a master slave connection You must configure UNI RLMI with the DTE user side as the Master and the DCE network side as the Slave You can configure either side of an NNI...

Страница 570: ... Only No switchover occurs when a link goes down or up A switchover can occur only by a manual NMS forced switchover Full Revertive default Reverts to primary binding when primary is up Semi Revertive Remains on backup binding when primary is up 8 Choose the Select Backup LPort button The Select Backup LPort dialog box Figure 15 3 appears Figure 15 3 Select Backup LPort Dialog Box 9 Select the bac...

Страница 571: ...enu as shown in Figure 15 4 Figure 15 4 Modifying a Service Name The Modify Service Name dialog box Figure 15 5 appears The Backup Binding status field displays the message RLMI Binding Active Figure 15 5 Modify Service Name Dialog Box 2 Select the Force Switchover mode Pull down list options include Noop No switchover occurs Switchover The current binding is switched to the other binding for exam...

Страница 572: ... Switchover Mode field only when the Master Slave Mode field is configured as Master Options include Manual Only No switchover occurs when a link goes down or up A switchover can occur only by a manual NMS forced switchover Full Revertive default Reverts to primary binding when primary is up Semi Revertive Remains on backup binding when primary is up 4 Choose OK Note To add a circuit connection an...

Страница 573: ...as they are for permanent virtual circuits PVCs Instead end stations use a signaling protocol to indicate to the ATM network the endpoint to which it should route the SVC request called party To support SVC services each user endpoint is assigned a unique address which identifies the endpoint and enables the network to route the SVC request Note You cannot configure ATM SVCs on B STDX 9000 switche...

Страница 574: ...se servers handles the call Native E 164 address format E 164 addresses are phone numbers This address format is simple and familiar native E 164 addresses are a convenient choice for service providers using a public ATM network for example Regional Bell Operating Companies RBOCs that already own E 164 address space The following sections describe these address formats AESA Formats The GX 550 and ...

Страница 575: ...below a Native E 164 address is converted to BCD format Leading zeros are added to obtain the maximum length of 15 octets and a trailing semi octet 0xF is added to pad the final semi octet The high order domain specific part HO DSP and the end system identifier ESI must be all zeros For specific information see Section 5 1 3 1 1 3 of the ATM User Network Interface UNI Specification 3 1 Figure 16 1...

Страница 576: ... Specific Part There are two subfields the AFI and IDI fields Authority and format identifier AFI The AFI part of the AESA address identifies the authority that allocates the DCC ICD or E 164 part of the AESA address as well as the syntax of the rest of the address Table 16 1 lists the default AFIs Table 16 1 AFI Default Values Address Type AFI Description DCC 0x39 DCC Anycast 0xBD ICD 0x47 ICD An...

Страница 577: ... field that is not used for ATM routing but may be used by the end system Table 16 2 IDI Default Values Address Type IDI Description DCC including Anycast Consists of 2 octets 4 hex digits that identify the country in which this address is registered The DCC is generally considered a three digit quantity with a trailing hex f semi octet For example the ANSI IDI of 840 is encoded as 0x840f ICD Anyc...

Страница 578: ...ats Figure 16 3 shows how the octets are assigned for each AESA address format Each octet is equivalent to two hex digits Figure 16 3 AESA Address Formats DCC AESA Format ICD AESA Format E 164 AESA Format Custom AESA Format AFI AFI AFI AFI DCC HO DSP ESI SEL ICD HO DSP ESI SEL SEL E 164 HO DSP ESI HO DSP IDP DSP IDP DSP IDP DSP ESI SEL ...

Страница 579: ...d SEL portions as well as any leading zeros in the 8 octet AESA E 164 address are stripped off to produce the native E 164 address Designing an Address Format Plan The SVC address formats you select must support the equipment and services your network needs to provide Keep in mind that some CPEs may not support certain address formats To avoid address conflicts apply for globally recognized addres...

Страница 580: ...valid at the UNI Address registration provides a mechanism for address information to be dynamically exchanged between the user and the network enabling both to determine the valid ATM addresses that are in effect at a UNI Address registration applies only to UNI ports on which Interim Link Management Interface ILMI is enabled see Table 3 5 on page 3 35 for instructions on how to enable ILMI on a ...

Страница 581: ...catenated with a NULL user part by the user and returned to the network as native E 164 addresses The prefix and address are identical Network Side IEEE MAC Addresses SEL 00 00 5F 00 62 01 00 00 00 5F 00 62 02 00 00 00 5F 00 62 03 00 Network prefixes sent to user side User side appends user part returns complete AESA address Resulting ILMI Address Table at DCE 45 42BF 352F123B662CA124B8F5 45 42BF ...

Страница 582: ...mon address parts of the node For example if all addresses on the node contain the digits 15085551 you would define this as the node prefix To allow for address routing node prefixes should be unique to a switch if not the switch has to perform subsequent matching to find a route to the destination The following example shows three nodes configured with a combination of native E 164 node prefixes ...

Страница 583: ... 2 Port prefix 5085 on Node 2 is a longer match than node prefix 508 on Node 1 and node prefix 508 on Node 3 6175551111 1 Node prefix 6 on Node 1 is the only match 6035551111 2 Port prefix 6035 on Node 2 is a longer match than node prefix 6 on Node 1 and node prefix 603 on Node 3 6038558888 3 Node prefix 603 on Node 3 is a longer match than node prefix 6 on Node 1 There is no matching prefix or ad...

Страница 584: ...work port functions as described in Table 16 7 and Table 16 8 The following factors determine how address translation occurs Whether or not local and or remote gateway addresses are defined on the egress port The type of translation tunnel or replace selected as the egress address translation mode The numbering plan of the signaled calling and called addresses Calling party and called party proces...

Страница 585: ...ort Signaled Address SETUP Information Element No Local Gateway Address Local Gateway Address with Tunnel Option Local Gateway Address with Replace Option No Calling Party Calling Party Address Null Local Gateway Address Local Gateway Address Calling Party Sub address Null Null Null AESA Calling Party Calling Party Address Signaled AESA Calling Party Address Local Gateway Address Local Gateway Add...

Страница 586: ...o Remote Gateway Address Remote Gateway Address with Tunnel Option Remote Gateway Address with Replace Option AESA Called Party Called Party Address Signaled AESA Called Party Address Remote Gateway Address Remote Gateway Address Called Party Sub address Null Signaled AESA Called Party Address Null Native E 164 Called Party Called Party Address Signaled Native E 164 Called Party Address Remote Gat...

Страница 587: ...ivate Network Node A Example 1 A B null null X Y A B X Y A B A B null null Egress tunneling enabled on Network 1 s egress port Local Gateway address X configured to a prefix on Network 1 s egress Remote Gateway address Y configured to a prefix on Network 1 s egress Network 1 Network 2 Ingress tunneling enabled on Network 2 s ingress port port and the prefix corresponds to B port and the prefix cor...

Страница 588: ...ddress X A A B null null X B null null X B null null Local Gateway address X configured to a prefix on Network 1 s egress port and the prefix corresponds to B Network 1 B Example 4 Replace option selected on egress port of Network 1 Private Network Node Public ATM Network Address X A A B null null X Y null null X Y null null Local Gateway address X configured to a prefix on Network 1 s egress port...

Страница 589: ...pre subscribed source validation network IDs It is also possible to ignore the signaled TNS to allow routing based on the called party address instead of the TNS value the signaled TNS is essentially stripped at the ingress port An SVC is routed based on one of the following addresses provided at the ingress port selected in listed order Signaled TNS Signaled Called Party Provisional Default TNS Y...

Страница 590: ...ucent implementation a PSA is an ATM UNI DCE logical port for which signaling is enabled Proxy signaling client PSC The network port attached to the endsystem for which a PSA performs signaling duties In the Lucent implementation a PSC is an ATM UNI DCE logical port for which signaling is disabled You can use proxy signaling to enable high end ATM equipment to support multiple physical interfaces ...

Страница 591: ...s destined for a PSC With UNI 4 0 signaling VPCI mapping provides an alias that represents the PSC s logical port and VPI address Each PSC needs a unique VPCI For example using the Signaling tab in the Configure SVC dialog box Figure 17 5 on page 17 11 configure the following VPCI mapping on a PSA port VPCI 1 means VPI 0 on port 12 VPCI 2 means VPI 0 on port 13 If the SVC request does not include ...

Страница 592: ...en VPCIs and SVC addresses The SVC address can be associated with a VPCI because the address is configured on a logical port that corresponds to the VPCI For example if VPCI 1 represents VPI 3 on logical port 4 and logical port 4 is configured for SVC address 5085551212 then the address 5085551212 is implicitly associated with VPCI 1 With this configuration an incoming SVC request at the PSA port ...

Страница 593: ...s registration combines the port user part with a node or port prefix to route the SVC request Configure SVC port addresses to route SVC requests to a specific logical port when the attached network device does not support address registration Configure a network ID to uniquely identify an inter exchange carrier IXC Note You cannot configure ATM SVCs on B STDX 9000 switches or CBX 500 Frame based ...

Страница 594: ...VC Attributes To set SVC parameters 1 In the Switch tab expand either the Cards or LPorts node and locate the node for the logical port you want to configure 2 Right click on the LPort instance node and select Configure SVCs from the pop up menu Figure 17 1 Figure 17 1 Configuring LPort SVC Parameters in the Switch Tab The Configure SVC dialog box appears Figure 17 2 on page 17 3 ...

Страница 595: ...VCs on page 17 11 Enables you to define proxy signaling parameters The fields in this dialog box also enable you to configure forward and reverse QoS class VPCI VPI mapping and logical port signaling tuning parameters Address Attributes for SVCs on page 17 19 Enables you to define various SVC screening and handling parameters for each logical port on the switch Connection ID Attributes for SVCs on...

Страница 596: ...nt IE then there are cases where the information in the AAL IE overrides the logical port setting This only occurs when requesting a non UBR AAL 1 and AAL 3 4 connection For all other cases including those where an AAL 5 IE user defined AAL IE or no AAL IE is signaled in the logical port setting will be in effect In cases where the incoming SVC does not include the AAL IE or includes a user define...

Страница 597: ...internal counter is reset every 15 minutes The default value of 1 means that if one SVC failure occurs on a logical port a trap is issued and no additional traps are issued until the next 15 minute period If you change the threshold value to 100 it means that 100 SVC failures must occur in a 15 minute window in order to trigger a trap If you enter zero 0 the switch never generates a failure trap L...

Страница 598: ...00 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 Enhanced IMA module the recommended minimum CDV Tolerance value is 1000 µsec The recommended minimum for the 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 IMA IOM or the CBX 3500 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 Enhanced IMA module is 1200 µsecs Default MCR 0 16777215 cells sec Enter the default MCR in cells per second CPS to be used for both directions of ABR calls when no MCR has been signa...

Страница 599: ...ailable regardless of the bumping eligibility setting disabled or enabled Bumping eligibility is valid only for non real time circuits based on QoS classes Real time circuits ignore this setting See Appendix E Priority Routing for more information Restricted Priority Routing Select the check box default to provision new SVCs at the lowest bandwidth priority regardless of configured higher bandwidt...

Страница 600: ...location QoS Class The four available QoS classes are listed in this column CBR VBR RT VBR NRT UBR ABR Allowed 0 100 Enter the bandwidth allocation percentage between 0 and 100 for each QoS class The default is 100 Traffic Descriptor Limits No Limits Select the check box if you do not want to set any TD limits default Clear the check box if you do want to set TD limits Specify Limits Choose the Sp...

Страница 601: ...ld Action Description PCR cells sec The maximum PCR in CPS that may be signaled for a CBR VBR RT or VBR NRT ATM SVC This attribute is used to qualify the forward PCR signaled at the ingress logical port and the backward PCR signaled at the egress logical port Enter a value between 0 2147483647 or accept the default value No Limit PCR No Limits Clear the PCR No Limits check box if you want to enter...

Страница 602: ...83647 or accept the default value No Limit MBS No Limits Clear the MBS No Limits check box if you want to enter a value in the MBS cells sec column MCR cells The maximum MCR in cells per second that may be signaled for an ABR ATM SVC This attribute is used to qualify the forward MCR signaled at the ingress logical port and the backward MCR signaled at the egress logical port Enter a value between ...

Страница 603: ...figure SVC Signaling Tab Complete the fields in the Signaling tab as described in Table 17 3 Table 17 3 Configure SVC Signaling Tab Fields Field Description Enable Signaling Select the check box to enable SVC proxy signaling Signaling Channel Traffic Descriptors Override Default for Forward signaling Select the check box to override the default TD for forward signaling You can then select a differ...

Страница 604: ... circuit equals the VPCI plus the value you enter VPI VPCI Sets mapping to negative offset Text box allows entry of integer offset The VPI of the corresponding circuit equals the VPCI minus the value you enter Table Sets mapping to VPCI entry from the VPCI table for the LPort This option has additional functions that are used with Proxy Signaling For information on configuring the VPCI table see C...

Страница 605: ...then choose the Tuning Parameters button The SVC Signaling Tuning dialog box appears Figure 17 6 Figure 17 6 SVC Signaling Tuning Dialog Box Use the SVC Signaling Tuning dialog box to set the Q 2931 thresholds and timers and the Q SAAL protocol data unit PDU thresholds and timers In general you should not change the default values The displayed defaults are based on the ATM protocol you selected f...

Страница 606: ... default is 180000 msec UNI 4 0 Q 2931 Q 2971 protocol only T303 ms Enter how long to wait for a response after a SETUP PDU has been sent The default is 4000 msec T308 ms Enter how long to wait for a response after a RELEASE PDU has been sent The default is 30000 msec T309 ms If Q SAAL is down enter how long to wait before SVCs are dropped The default is 10000 msec for the UNI 3 1 ATM protocol and...

Страница 607: ...oup node LGN SVCCs between neighboring LGNs Max CC Threshold Enter the maximum number of transaction retries for control PDUs The default is 4 Max PD Threshold Enter the maximum number of data PDUs without a POLL The default is 25 Max Stat Elements Threshold Enter the maximum number of missing elements in a STATUS PDU The default is 67 TCC ms Enter the retry time for control PDUs The default is 10...

Страница 608: ...CI table entry Adding a Management VPCI Table Entry To add a management VPCI table entry 1 In the switch tab expand the LPort node for the LPort for which you want to add a VPCI table entry The SVC node appears under the LPort node 2 Expand the SVC node The VPCI Tables node appears 3 Right click on the VPCI Tables class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Management VPCI Table Entry d...

Страница 609: ...Agent Dialog Box Table 17 5 Add Management VPCI Table Entry Dialog Box Fields Field Description Peer Client Agent Choose this button to launch the Peer Client dialog box in which you choose the proxy signalling client Active Select the check box to assign the VPCI VPI combination to the proxy signalling client Remove the check from the box to save this VPCI VPI combination in the database for late...

Страница 610: ...ify and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Management VPCI Table Entry dialog box appears 4 Modify the fields as described in Table 17 5 on page 17 17 5 If you want to modify the peer client choose the Peer Client button The Peer Client dialog box appears 6 Select the LPort for the peer client node 7 Choose OK The Peer Client dialog box closes 8 Choose OK in the Modify Management VPCI T...

Страница 611: ...gh a public network and where the address translation takes place Figure 17 9 Tunneling Through a Public Network Figure 17 10 shows an example of calling into a public network Figure 17 10 Calling Into a Public Network Private Network Node Public ATM Network Address X Address Y Private Network Node A B Egress Address Translation Occurs Here Ingress Address Translation Occurs Here CPE CPE A signals...

Страница 612: ...x select the Address tab Figure 17 11 Figure 17 11 Configure SVC Address Tab 2 Complete the fields in the Address tab as described in Table 17 6 Note The calling party insertion address is not used to route SVCs to this port To use the calling party insertion address to route SVCs to this port configure the address or a prefix corresponding to the address on this port For more information see Conf...

Страница 613: ...following when it receives an SVC request If there is no calling party address it inserts the calling party address specified in the Calling Party Address field If there is a calling party address it overwrites the existing calling party information element with the address specified in the Calling Party Address field If you select the Ingress Address Insertion check box and then choose Replace ca...

Страница 614: ...re than one option the ingress call is processed if it meets one or more of the selected criteria for example if you select both Node Prefix and Port Address the calling party address must match either a valid node prefix or a valid port address Calling Party Presentation Mode Choose one of the following buttons User Includes the calling party connected number address at egress ingress based on th...

Страница 615: ...uest or a source default network ID was provisioned at the ingress user s logical port Note Network IDs that do not match the adjacent network ID see the Adjacent Network field in Table 17 17 on page 17 70 are processed according to the configured presentation mode however a network ID that matches the adjacent network ID will never be signaled in egress calls presentation mode is Never Present Sc...

Страница 616: ...tion the AFI HO DSP ESI and SEL octets of the address are removed at the network s ingress logical port Also all leading zeros and the trailing Fh in the IDP portion of the address are removed For example the E 164 AESA address 45 000005085551234F 1A2B3C 0000050F0601 00 would be converted to the native E 164 address 5085551234 E 164 AESA to Native Select this option if you selected E 164 Native to...

Страница 617: ... DSP ESI and SEL octets of the AESA address are filled with zeros at the network s egress logical port Also leading zeros and the trailing Fh are added to the IDP portion For example the native E 164 address 5085551234 would be converted to AESA E 164 address 45 000005085551234F 00000000 000000000000 00 E 164 AESA to Native Select this option to convert E 164 AESA addresses to native E 164 format ...

Страница 618: ...E bit is cleared the IE may or may not be sent out but the decision will be based on the standard signaling protocol Select one of the following check boxes depending on how you wish to configure this SVC endpoint Called Party Remote address where the call is terminating egress address Calling Party Remote address where the call is initiated source address User User Between calling party and calle...

Страница 619: ...mber of Valid Bits in VPI see page 3 29 SVCC VCI 32 1023 Min and Max Enter the minimum and maximum values for the VCI range of switching The range depends on the number of VCI valid bits for direct UNI Direct UNI This range corresponds to the value you entered for Number of Valid Bits in VCI see page 3 30 Virtual UNI NNI This range depends on the number of VCI bits configured on the feeder direct ...

Страница 620: ... CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring SVC Parameters Configuring SVC Attributes CUG Attributes for SVCs The CUG tab fields allow you to configure Closed User Group parameters 1 From the Configure SVC dialog box select the CUG tab Figure 17 13 Figure 17 13 Configure SVC CUG Tab ...

Страница 621: ... Button options include None default E 164 DNIC AESA Incoming Access Select the check box if you want to accept calls from users that do not belong to the same CUG Clear the check box if you want to reject calls from users that do not belong to the same CUG default Outgoing Access Select the check box if you want to allow calls to users that do not belong to the same CUG Clear the check box if you...

Страница 622: ... of the AESA address or at least one digit of the 1 15 digit native E 164 address You can define the node prefix to be part of or all of the AESA or E 164 address For example for E 164 addresses that begin with 508555 you can configure the node prefix as 5 at a minimum 50 508 5085 etc The level of granularity you need to define depends on your network Node prefixes do not have to be unique to a pa...

Страница 623: ...efixes class node appears under the SVC node 3 Right click on the Node Prefixes class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add SVC Node Prefix dialog box appears Figure 17 14 Figure 17 14 Add SVC Node Prefix Dialog Box 4 To define a node prefix for a specific format a See Table 17 9 to select the address format b Select the scope Organizational scope defines how far into a hierarchical PNN...

Страница 624: ...n instructions DCC and ICD AESA Node Prefix Format on page 17 34 ICD AESA International Code Designator ICD AESA which identifies the international organization to which the address applies DCC and ICD AESA Node Prefix Format on page 17 34 ICD Anycast AESA Provides a group address function using ICD AESA address formats Use the ICD AESA configuration instructions DCC and ICD AESA Node Prefix Forma...

Страница 625: ...ial number such as 508 The value you enter is converted to the ASCII hex values that represent each digit in the number If you entered 5085552600 it converts to 35303835353532363030 2 Configure the address and routing options using the steps on page 17 38 Defining Address and Routing Options 3 Choose OK to save this node prefix and close the Add SVC Node Prefix dialog box Note If PNNI is enabled o...

Страница 626: ...screening and call routing The value increases by eight with each pair of address digits you type Click on one of the numbered radio buttons to decrease the number of address bits that are checked thereby enabling the node to perform call screening and call routing down to the bit level You can decrease the value by 1 7 bits For example if you enter the partial DCC AESA address 39 43BF12AC which u...

Страница 627: ...sses see AESA Formats on page 16 2 3 As you enter the address the value in the Bit Length field changes to indicate the number of address bits that are checked during call screening and call routing the value increases by eight with each pair of address digits you enter Click on the a radio button to decrease the number of address bits that are checked thereby enabling the node to perform call scr...

Страница 628: ...bits of the port prefix for call screening and call routing because the last two binary digits are 00 click the 38 radio button in the Bit Length field 4 Configure the address and routing options using the steps on page 17 38 Defining Address and Routing Options 5 Choose OK to save this node prefix and close the Add SVC Node Prefix dialog box Address you entered Address in binary 40 bits 45 000005...

Страница 629: ...ess the HO DSP ESI and SEL entries are optional However you must enter the AFI digits For information about these items see AESA Formats on page 16 2 3 As you type the address the value in the Bit Length field changes to indicate the number of address bits that are checked during call screening and call routing The value increases by eight with each pair of address digits you type Click another ra...

Страница 630: ...nary 38 bits 01010001 010000111100111100010010101111 Address you entered Address in binary 40 bits 51 43BF12A8 01010001 01000011110011110001001010111000 Address in binary 37 bits 01010001 01000011110011110001001010111 Table 17 10 Add SVC Node Prefix General Tab Fields Field Action Description Source Address Validation Select the check box to validate the calling party address against the node pref...

Страница 631: ...Select the check box to advertise this name within the VNN routing domain as an external name An external name is a name that is reachable within another VNN routing domain If you clear the check box default this name is only reachable within the VNN routing domain Suppress Advertisement PNNI Select the check box to prevent advertising this address across the PNNI domain If you clear the check box...

Страница 632: ... the appropriate address format from the pull down list see Table 17 9 on page 17 32 Anycast box Select the check box if the format type is an anycast version Prefix Enter the address of the prefix The format of the dialog box will depend on the address format you selected Bit Length For AESA formats As you enter the address a button is highlighted to indicate the number of address bits that are c...

Страница 633: ...e a port prefix 1 In the navigation panel expand the instance node for the LPort for which you want to add an SVC port prefix The SVC class node appears under the LPort instance node 2 Expand the SVC class node The Port Prefix class node appears under the LPort instance node 3 Right click on the Port Prefix class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add SVC Port Prefix dialog box appears F...

Страница 634: ...TDX 9000 Configuring SVC Parameters Configuring SVC Port Prefixes 5 Continue with the section that corresponds to the address format you select from the Format field Format See E 164 Native page 17 43 ICD Anycast AESA page 17 44 E 164 Anycast AESA page 17 45 Custom AESA page 17 47 Default Route page 17 52 ...

Страница 635: ... the E 164 address For example enter 5085552600 a standard 10 digit U S phone number or enter a partial number such as 508 The value you enter is converted to the ASCII hex values that represent each digit in the number If you entered 508555260 it converts to 35303835353532363030 2 If the port provides a network to network connection see Setting the Local and Remote Gateway Address for Port Prefix...

Страница 636: ...P ESI and SEL portions of the address For information on the appropriate format to use for DCC and ICD addresses see AESA Formats on page 16 2 3 As you enter the address the value in the Bit Length field changes to indicate the number of address bits that are checked during call screening and call routing The value increases by eight with each pair of address digits you type Click on one of the nu...

Страница 637: ...re 17 22 Add SVC Port Prefix E 164 AESA Format 1 In the E 164 field enter the full or partial E 164 AESA address Since the IDI portion of the address is 8 octets 16 hex digits but the E 164 address format is a maximum of 15 digits you must terminate the IDI portion with Fh 2 If you enter the IDI portion of the address you can optionally enter the HO DSP ESI and SEL portions For example if you ente...

Страница 638: ...e by 1 7 bits For example if you enter the partial E 164 AESA address 45 00000504 which uses 40 bits as the port prefix but only need to check the first 38 bits of the port prefix for call screening and call routing because the last two binary digits are 00 then click the 38 radio button in the Bit Length field 4 If the port provides a network to network connection see Setting the Local and Remote...

Страница 639: ...ed for the SEL You do not have to enter the entire address the HO DSP ESI and SEL entries are optional However the AFI digits are required For information on these items see AESA Formats on page 16 2 3 As you enter the address the value in the Bit Length field changes to indicate the number of address bits checked during call screening call routing The value increases by eight with each address di...

Страница 640: ...work connection see Setting the Local and Remote Gateway Address for Port Prefixes on page 17 49 for instructions When done proceed to step 5 5 See Table 17 12 on page 17 53 to configure additional port prefix options 6 Choose OK to save this port prefix and close the Add SVC Port Prefix dialog box Address you entered Address in binary 40 bits 51 43BF12AC 01010001 01000011110011110001001010111100 ...

Страница 641: ...the network to network connection Figure 17 24 Setting Local and Remote Gateway Addresses You can configure prefixes on a network to network port with the following addresses Null local and remote gateway addresses Only a local gateway address Only a remote gateway address Both a local and a remote gateway address A1 Private Network Node Public ATM Network Endpoint A calling Endpoint B Local Gatew...

Страница 642: ...ab as described in Table 17 11 Table 17 11 Add SVC Port Prefix Gateway Tab Fields Field Action Description Local Select this check box if you want to specify the local gateway address Format for Local Select the address format from the pull down menu Anycast for Local Select this check box if the format type is an anycast version Address for Local Enter the address of the public network gateway us...

Страница 643: ...e 17 53 Anycast for Remote Select this check box if the format type is an anycast version Address for Remote Enter the address of the public network gateway used to exit from the public network back to the private network OK Saves any changes you made in the current dialog box then closes it Cancel Closes the dialog box without saving any of the changes you made Apply Saves any changes you made in...

Страница 644: ...ned If more than one port has a default route defined then the administrative cost value is used to determine the port to which the call is routed You can define multiple default routes within a node or network The default route typically applies to network to network logical ports Interim Inter switch Signaling Protocol IISP or public UNI DTE Figure 17 26 Add SVC Port Prefix Default Route To defi...

Страница 645: ... Validation Select this check box to validate the calling party address against the port prefix associated with the UNI NNI port that received the call setup message If you clear this check box this port prefix is not used to validate calling party addresses Route Determination If you select this check box the OSPF protocol uses this port prefix for route determination If you clear this check box ...

Страница 646: ... this address to be advertised across the VNN OSPF routing domain Select this check box to prevent advertising this address across the OSPF routing domain Admin Cost 0 65535 Enter the administrative cost associated with the port prefix When an SVC is being created if more than one port in the network is found with the same port prefix the call is routed to the port in the network that has the lowe...

Страница 647: ...by a selector byte This 20 byte address can then be used as an SVC or SPVC endpoint The six byte ESI portion can be automatically generated and assigned by Navis EMS CBGX These six bytes are defined based on the shelf slot physical port and logical port IDs and can only be created automatically if node prefixes are already configured on the switch The automatic assignment of ESI bytes can be done ...

Страница 648: ...n the GX 550 switch GX 550 Switch 0xa Quadrant 1 in GX 550 0xb Quadrant 2 in GX 550 0xc Quadrant 3 in GX 550 0xd Quadrant 4 in GX 550 8 bits Physical port information A range of 0x00 to 0xff represents physical ports from 0 to 255 1 64 CBX B STDX or CBX 1 16 GX 550 without a GX 550 ES 1 12 GX 550 ES connected to a GX 550 switch 16 bits Interface ID Ranges from 0x0000 to 0xffff 8 bits Selector ID F...

Страница 649: ...e instance node for the LPort for which you want to add an SVC port address 2 Expand the SVC class node under the LPort instance node The Port Addresses class node appears under the SVC class node 3 Right click on the Port Addresses class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add SVC Port Address dialog box appears Figure 17 28 Figure 17 28 Add SVC Port Address Dialog Box 4 Select an addres...

Страница 650: ...0 and B STDX 9000 Configuring SVC Parameters Configuring SVC Port Addresses 5 Continue with the section that corresponds to the address format you select Format See E 164 Native page 17 59 DCC Anycast AESA page 17 60 ICD Anycast AESA page 17 60 E 164 Anycast AESA page 17 61 Custom AESA page 17 62 ...

Страница 651: ...e 1 15 ASCII digits that represent the E 164 address For example enter 5085552600 a standard 10 digit U S phone number The value you enter is converted to the ASCII hex values that represent each digit in the number For example 5085552600 converts to 35303835353532363030 2 See Table 17 14 on page 17 63 to configure additional fields 3 Choose OK to save the port address and close the Add SVC Port A...

Страница 652: ...eld enter the DCC of the country in which the address is registered or the ICD that identifies the international organization to which this address applies DCCs and ICDs consist of 4 hex digits and occupy two octets b Enter the appropriate HO DSP ESI and SEL values For information on these items and the appropriate format to use for DCC and ICD AESA addresses see AESA Formats on page 16 2 c See Ta...

Страница 653: ...r partial E 164 AESA address Since the IDI portion of the address is 8 octets 16 hex digits but the E 164 address format is a maximum of 15 digits you must terminate the IDI portion with F For example enter 5085551234 as 000005085551234F b After you type the IDI portion of the address enter the appropriate HO DSP ESI and SEL portions to complete the address For information on the appropriate forma...

Страница 654: ...below a In the AFI field enter the custom AFI value b In the Hex Digits field enter the customized address format starting with the HO DSP followed by the ESI and SEL values in that order This address must be the full 19 octets 38 hex digits long with 12 octets used for the HO DSP 6 octets used for the ESI and 1 octet used for the SEL For information on these items see AESA Formats on page 16 2 c ...

Страница 655: ...his check box to enable validation of the calling party address against the UNI NNI port address that received the call setup message Clear the check box to disable validation of the calling party address against the UNI NNI port address that received the call setup message Route Determination Select this check box to specify that the OSPF protocol use this address for route determination Enable t...

Страница 656: ...to be advertised across the PNNI routing domain if the local switch is connected to a PNNI peer group Suppress Advertisement OSPF Selecting this check box indicates that this address is prevented from being advertised across the VNN OSPF routing domain If you clear the checkbox this address will be allowed to be advertised across the VNN OSPF routing domain Admin Cost 0 65535 Enter the administrat...

Страница 657: ...this check box if you want to terminate an SPVC to this address on the logical port Any Connection ID Choose this button if you want the network to allocate a VPI for the soft permanent virtual path connection SPVPC Note that if you selected the check box in the PVC field this button is automatically chosen and cannot be changed Specify Connection ID Choose this button if you want to supply a VPI ...

Страница 658: ...nection ID Choose this button if you want to supply a VPI VCI value Note that you cannot select this button if you also selected the PVP check box enabling PVP termination VPI 1 15 Enter the VPI of the logical port on which you want the switch to terminate this SPVCC VCI 1 1023 Enter the VCI of the logical port on which you want the switch to terminate this SPVCC Table 17 15 Add SVC Port Address T...

Страница 659: ... The full addresses are then written back to the DCE device s ILMI address table When you configure the port user part to complete an address connection with the attached DCE device you can supply any 7 octet value as the user part it does not have to be a real IEEE MAC address and SEL combination Also you should enter any user addresses in your network that you want to make known to the attached ...

Страница 660: ... Part dialog box appears Figure 17 36 Figure 17 36 Add User Part Dialog Box 4 Complete the fields as described in Table 17 16 5 When you have completed all fields choose OK The Add User Part dialog box closes Table 17 16 Add User Part Dialog Box Fields Field Action Description Format Displays User Part Number of Bits Displays the number of bits in the address Address ESI Enter the end system ident...

Страница 661: ...16 17 Adding a Network ID To add a network ID 1 Expand the LPort instance node for the LPort for which you want to add a network ID The SVC class node appears under the LPort instance node 2 Expand the SVC class node The Network ID class node appears 3 Right click on the Network ID class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Network ID dialog box appears Figure 17 37 Figure 17 37 Add Ne...

Страница 662: ...d TNS may be screened against this network ID If you enable this field route determination is disabled and the source default is enabled Source Default Select this check box to enable source default for this network ID Only one network ID on each port can have this attribute When enabled this network ID represents the preferred IXC for user calls originating on this logical port Route Determinatio...

Страница 663: ...and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Network ID dialog box appears 4 Modify the fields For a description of the fields see Table 17 17 on page 17 70 5 When you have completed the fields choose OK The Modify Network ID dialog box closes Deleting a Network ID To delete an existing network ID 1 Expand the SVC class node under the LPort or under the switch The Network ID class node appear...

Страница 664: ...Beta Draft Confidential 17 721 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring SVC Parameters Defining Network ID Parameters ...

Страница 665: ...sions one end of the SPVC with the address identifying the egress interface from the network The calling end has the responsibility for establishing releasing and re establishing the call Supported Modules SPVCs are supported on the following ATM modules Table 18 1 SPVC ATM Module Support CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 B STDX 9000 4 Port ATM UNI OC 3c STM 1 4 Port ATM UNI OC 3c STM 1 BIO1 1 Port ATM CS D...

Страница 666: ...ifier VPI VCI value You configure the other endpoint s known as the terminating endpoints with addresses as you would an SVC Optionally you may also specify the remote VPI VCI values The originating endpoint uses signaling to access the terminating endpoints If you configure the terminating endpoint with a port prefix the connected device must signal the port address Specifying just the port prefi...

Страница 667: ...ported on the CBX 3500 4 Port OC 3c STM 1 card Using PVC PVP Termination Before you can configure SPVCs you must first configure the SVC address or prefix you want to assign to the SPVC terminating endpoint This endpoint may not actually terminate the SPVC When you configure an SVC port address you enable or disable PVC permanent virtual path PVP termination If you disable termination the egress l...

Страница 668: ...y vendor using any protocol You only have Lucent equipment at one endpoint but the SPVC traverses only Lucent Virtual Network Navigator VNN or PNNI links Some LAN based ATM networks currently support the PNNI protocol If the SPVC must traverse UNI or Interim Inter switch Signalling Protocol IISP links and one end of the SPVC is not Lucent equipment you cannot use the Specified target select type T...

Страница 669: ...e you up to 32 virtual paths VPs numbered 0 31 For more information on setting the Valid Bits in VPI for the logical port see Figure 3 10 on page 3 28 If you are defining a SPVCC you must also specify a value to represent the VCI for an ATM circuit The maximum value is based on the Valid Bits in VCI value that is configured for the logical port as follows Maximum value 2C 1 where C is the value in...

Страница 670: ...To configure a PMP offnet circuit see Defining a PMP SPVC Offnet Circuit on page 18 30 You access the Offnet Circuits node from the Circuits node You can access the Circuits node from the switch or from an LPort node When you create an Offnet Circuit from an LPort node the selected LPort is automatically set as the Endpoint 1 of the new Offnet Circuit To open the Add Offnet Circuit dialog box 1 Ex...

Страница 671: ...5 Continue with Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch or Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port to select the endpoint Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch To select an endpoint fr0m a switch 1 In the Offnet EndPoint Selection dialog box expand the node for the desired switch for Endpoint 1 If you are creating an Offnet Circuit from an LPort node Endpoint 1 is already set for that LPort Skip to s...

Страница 672: ...ch and expand the node for the desired card or module 3 Expand the PPorts node and expand the node for the desired physical port 4 Expand the LPorts node and select the desired LPort 5 Select the SVC Address or the Select Address tab to select or create a Terminating Endpoint 6 Continue with Selecting the Terminating Endpoint Address Selecting the Terminating Endpoint Address To complete this conf...

Страница 673: ...ddress DCC and ICD AESA or Anycast In the DCC field enter the data country code DCC of the country in which the address is registered or the International Country Designator ICD that identifies the international organization to which this address applies DCCs and ICDs consist of 4 hex digits and occupy two octets Then enter the appropriate HO DSP ESI and SEL values in those fields E 164 AESA or An...

Страница 674: ...ces Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring SPVCs Defining a Point to Point Offnet Circuit Connection Figure 18 3 Add OffNet Circuit Dialog Box 6 Continue with Configuring Offnet Circuit Parameters on page 18 11 ...

Страница 675: ...er type Administrative page 18 11 Traffic Type page 18 15 User Preference page 18 21 Accounting page 18 22 Path page 18 24 FRF 5 page 18 27 Administrative Attributes 1 In the Add OffNet Circuit dialog box select the Administrative tab Figure 18 4 Figure 18 4 Add OffNet Circuit Administrative Tab 2 Complete the fields in the Administrative tab as described in Table 18 4 Note Before you configure th...

Страница 676: ...his button if you do not want to activate the circuit at switch startup Circuit Type ATM to ATM only Specify whether the circuit is a VPC or VCC default VPC Choose this button for the VCI field to be set to zero 0 It cannot be changed A VPC enables a network that interfaces with an OPTimum trunk to accept circuits with this VPI and any of its valid VCIs VCC Choose this button to accept the default...

Страница 677: ... the Management Circuit check box to include this configuration in the NMS initialization script file This file contains all the SNMP set requests necessary to replicate the entire switch configuration Once you download this file to the switch this circuit can be used to establish NMS to switch connectivity This option is especially useful in some management DLCI configurations The default value i...

Страница 678: ...ogical port Crankback information is information about dynamic rerouting of call setups around failed nodes or links or links with insufficient resources on the traced path Clear the check box default to disable crankback information collection Pass Along Request Select the check box to enable default pass along request for circuits that pass through this logical port When the path trace continues...

Страница 679: ...rcuit Traffic Type Tab On an FRF 5 circuit the Reverse QoS class is not configurable by the user but is set by the NMS based on the service type of the destination endpoint and the QoS class of the originating endpoint However the TDs for the destination endpoint can be configured by the user If both endpoints are Frame Relay service then the QoS class of the originating endpoint is used for the t...

Страница 680: ...plete the Traffic Type tab fields as described in Table 18 6 Table 18 5 Allowable QoS Classes QoS Class ATM Endpoint Frame Relay Endpoint VBR RT X VBR NRT X UBR X VFR RT X VFR NRT X UFR X You must configure Traffic Type attributes before choosing OK in the Add Offnet Circuit dialog box to save the circuit configuration Otherwise the default values for committed information rate CIR committed burst...

Страница 681: ...fic Note UBR and ABR are used only with the ATM Flow Control Processor FCP The following pull down menu options are available for Frame Relay endpoints VFR Real Time VFR RT is used for packaging special delay sensitive applications such as packet video which require low cell delay variation between endpoints VFR Non Real Time VFR NRT handles packaging for transfer of long bursty data streams over ...

Страница 682: ... specify the sustainable cell rate SCR in CPS for the combined high priority traffic that is the CLP 0 cell stream SCR CLP 0 1 cells sec Displays only if you selected a TD combination that includes SCR CLP 0 1 If so specify the SCR in CPS for the combined high and low priority traffic that is the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream MBS CLP 0 cells Displays only if you selected a TD combination that incl...

Страница 683: ...metric you can set a different CIR in each direction which provides more efficient use of bandwidth BC kbits Forward and Reverse direction Select the maximum amount of data in kilobits Kb that the network attempts to transfer under normal conditions during a specified time interval Tc Tc is calculated as Bc CIR This value must be greater than zero and is typically set to the same value as CIR BE k...

Страница 684: ... Select Traffic Shaper dialog box If this circuit carries ATM cell traffic use the default of none in the Id column If this circuit carries frame relay traffic select one of the configured shapers These shapers correspond to the traffic shapers configured for the physical port on which this logical port resides For information about physical port traffic shaping see the Switch Module Configuration...

Страница 685: ...X 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 0518 21 User Preference Attributes Select the User Preference tab from the Add OffNet Circuit dialog box Figure 18 6 to select the TDs for this offnet circuit Figure 18 6 Add OffNet Circuit User Preference Tab For more information about configuring these attributes see User Preference Attributes on page 10 60 ...

Страница 686: ...ed in Table 18 7 Table 18 7 Add OffNet Circuit Accounting Tab Fields Field Action Description Carrier ID Endpoint 1 Displays the 5 digit Carrier identifier ID This number uniquely identifies the carrier at each end of the network interface If you have not yet configured accounting at the LPort level then this field is set to zero 0 Recording Interface ID Endpoint 1 Displays the 16 digit circuit Re...

Страница 687: ...eter Recording Endpoint 2 only If this check box is selected circuit parameter information QoS CIR BC and BE is included in the billing record PVC Accounting Endpoint 1 and Endpoint 2 Choose one of the following PVC Accounting buttons Enable PVC usage data is collected on the PVC if PVC Accounting is set to Enable at the switch level If PVC Accounting is set to Disable at the switch level setting ...

Страница 688: ...X 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Configuring SPVCs Defining a Point to Point Offnet Circuit Connection Path Attributes 1 Select the Path tab from the Add OffNet Circuit dialog box Figure 18 8 to set the circuit path parameters for this offnet circuit Figure 18 8 Add OffNet Circuit Path Tab ...

Страница 689: ... of hops trunk switch pairs in the defined path 3 Define the path using the Trunks and Next Switch fields selecting trunk switch pairs from the list of available hops to include the hop in the circuit path and then choose the Add to Path button When there are multiple trunks between two switches select Any Trunk to route the circuit based on OSPF 4 Click Non Lucent Node The PNNI Node ATM Address d...

Страница 690: ... the Use Defined Path check box to specify whether to use the defined path or to enable the network routing to specify the circuit path Check box selected Enabled Routes the circuit based on the manually defined route Check box cleared Disabled Routes the circuit based on the network s OSPF algorithm 9 Enable or disable the Alternate Path check box to specify whether OSPF should route the circuit ...

Страница 691: ... a Frame Relay logical port on either a CBX 500 or CBX 3500 Figure 18 11 Add OffNet Circuit FRF 5 Tab 2 Complete the FRF 5 tab fields in the Add OffNet Circuit dialog box as described in Table 18 8 Table 18 8 Add OffNet Circuit FRF 5 Tab Fields Field Action Description FRF 5 Over PNNI Select this check box to enable the FRF 5 over PNNI capability Clear this check box to disable default Call Initia...

Страница 692: ...red at the UNI port The LMI that the NNI runs will use the NNI DLCI to identify the network interworking PVC Enter an NNI DLCI within the valid range of 16 991 or 1022 Notes This NNI DLCI number must match the Terminating Endpoint NNI DLCI number Review the Restrictions and Special Considerations section of the Software Release Notice for CBX Switch Software that comes with your release for inform...

Страница 693: ... new route and or path The circuit must be in a managed state for the Restart option to be available Restart is not available for PMP offnet circuits To restart an offnet circuit 1 Expand the Circuits node 2 Expand the Offnet Circuits class node 3 Right click on the Offnet Circuit you wish to restart and select Restart from the pop up menu The Restart option will only be available if the circuit i...

Страница 694: ...s Defining PMP Offnet Circuit Roots You access the Offnet PMP Roots node from the Circuits node You can access the Circuits node from the switch or from an LPort node When you create an Offnet PMP Root from an LPort node the selected LPort is automatically set as the Offnet PMP Root Endpoint To add an Offnet PMP PVC Root 1 Expand the Circuits node 2 Select the Offnet PMP Roots node 3 Right click t...

Страница 695: ...ring Offnet PMP PVC Root Parameters on page 18 32 5 Select the PMP root endpoint by using either of the following procedures Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch below Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port below Selecting an Endpoint From a Switch To select an endpoint from a switch 1 In the Select Endpoint dialog box expand the node for the desired switch for the endpoint 2 Expand the LPorts ...

Страница 696: ...e Cards node 3 Expand the node for the desired card 4 Expand the PPorts node 5 Expand the node for the desired physical port 6 Expand the LPorts node 7 Select the desired LPort 8 Choose OK and continue with Configuring Offnet PMP PVC Root Parameters in the next section Configuring Offnet PMP PVC Root Parameters To configure offnet point to multipoint PVC root parameters you enter information in ea...

Страница 697: ...re 18 14 Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root Administrative Tab 2 Complete the Administrative tab fields in the Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root dialog box as described in Table 18 9 Table 18 9 Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root Administrative Tab Fields Field Action Description Root Name Enter any unique alphanumeric name to identify the Offnet circuit root Do not use parentheses ...

Страница 698: ... CDV Tolerance value is 1000 µsec The recommended minimum for the 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 IMA IOM or the CBX 3500 1 Port Channelized STM 1 E1 Enhanced IMA module is 1200 µsecs Bulk Statistics Select the check box to enable Bulk Statistics to configure statistics collection from a circuit using the NavisXtend Statistics Server Clear the check box to disable default Note If you enable Bulk Stati...

Страница 699: ...red continue with the Traffic Type attributes Traffic Type Attributes To configure offnet PMP PVC root traffic type attributes 1 In the Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root dialog box select the Traffic Type tab Figure 18 15 Figure 18 15 Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root Traffic Type Tab 2 Complete the Traffic Type tab fields in the Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root dialog box as de...

Страница 700: ...age 18 37 to create the offnet circuit leaves Table 18 10 Add Offnet Point to Multipoint PVC Root Traffic Type Tab Fields Field Action Description QoS Class Forward or Reverse direction Select one of the following QoS values from the pull down list CBR Used for applications that are represented by a continuous bit stream such as video and digitized voice CBR traffic requires guaranteed throughput ...

Страница 701: ... root and select Delete from the popup menu A dialog box asks if you are sure you want to delete the selected item 4 Choose OK Defining Offnet PMP Leaves The following steps describe the process for creating an Offnet PMP Leaf 1 In the Navigational Panel expand the Circuits node 2 Expand the Offnet PMP Roots node 3 Expand the desired Offnet PMP Root 4 Select the Offnet PMP Leaves node 5 Perform on...

Страница 702: ...with Configuring Offnet PMP Leaf Parameters on page 18 40 Opening the Select Endpoint Dialog Box To select an Offnet PMP Leaf endpoint open the Select Endpoint dialog box 1 In the Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf dialog box choose the Select button from the Endpoints field The Select Endpoint dialog box appears Figure 18 17 Figure 18 17 Select Endpoint Dialog Box Offnet PMP Leaf 2 Select the Offne...

Страница 703: ...Ports node under the switch and select the desired LPort 3 Select the Address tab and enter the address prefix in the Prefix field Figure 18 18 Figure 18 18 Select Endpoint Address Tab 4 Choose OK and continue with Configuring Offnet PMP Leaf Parameters on page 18 40 Selecting an Endpoint From a Physical Port To select an endpoint from a physical port 1 In the Select Endpoint dialog box expand the...

Страница 704: ...6 complete the Administrative tab fields as described in Table 18 11 Table 18 11 Add Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf Administrative Tab Fields Field Action Description Admin Status Select the Up button default to activate the circuit at switch startup Select the Down button if you do not want to activate the circuit at switch startup Target Select Type Review the information in Specifying the Target ...

Страница 705: ...elect the desired Offnet PMP Leaf 5 Perform one of the following Select Modify from the Actions menu Choose the Modify button from the toolbar Right click on the PMP Soft Leaf node and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf dialog box appears Figure 18 19 Modify Point to Multipoint PVC Leaf Dialog Box 6 Modify the desired parameters See Table 18 11 on page 18 40...

Страница 706: ...ffnet Circuit 4 Expand the Offnet PMP Leaves node and select the desired Offnet PMP leaf 5 Perform one of the following Select Delete from the Actions menu Choose the Delete button from the toolbar Right click on the Offnet PMP leaf and select Delete from the pop up menu A dialog box asks if you are sure you want to delete the selected item 6 Choose OK ...

Страница 707: ...erview This section provides background information and examples of CUGs This section contains About CUGs on page 19 1 About CUG Member Rules on page 19 2 Developing CUGs on page 19 3 About CUGs A CUG is a division of all SVC network users into logically linked groups of users Members of the same CUG have particular calling privileges that members of different CUGs may not have CUGs form one level...

Страница 708: ...on You can use the as a wildcard to replace zero one or more digits or the as a wildcard to replace a single digit You can only use the once in a string Keep in mind that an X 121 digit is 4 bits and an E1 64 digit is 8 bits The examples in Table 19 1 show how you can use wildcards to represent multiple E 164 addresses When you define a CUG member these addresses define the member value for the CU...

Страница 709: ...ccess the CUG member can only make calls to other members of the same CUG For example the following CUG member rule applies to E 164 addresses beginning with digits 1508 Users that map to this rule can receive calls from members of their own CUG members of other CUGs and non CUG users incoming access is enabled but they cannot make calls outside their own CUG Developing CUGs For each CUG you creat...

Страница 710: ...rk Figure 19 1 Implementing CUGs The CUGs used in this example represent the following CUG A Business Unit A CUG B Business Unit B CUG C Independent entity within Unit B CUG D Joint venture between Units A and B For each of these CUGs the following table defines the ICB and OCB attributes and member rules Each member rule is made up of an expression that represents an E 164 address and an IA and O...

Страница 711: ...12 OA enabled Address belongs to CUG B and CUG D Result Although both addresses belong to CUG B the call fails because the OCB attribute is enabled on CUG B for member 1616349 Users mapping to matching rule 1616349 cannot make calls to other CUG B members A call is made from 12035551212 to 15085551212 The address 12035551212 does not belong to any CUG 15085551212 IA enabled Address belongs to CUG ...

Страница 712: ... the call However CUG membership must be recalculated at call time if the port to which this address is routed contains other CUGs with member rules that begin with the digits 1616 For example if a CUG contains a member rule that uses a prefix format for example 1616 as well as other member rules that are more specific 1616349 you are likely to encounter performance issues due to address ambiguity...

Страница 713: ...names see Defining a CUG on page 19 9 and associate CUG members to specific CUGs You can also modify call access attributes for a specific CUG Defining CUG Members A CUG member is defined by a rule that matches one or more port addresses prefixes and attributes that specify incoming and outgoing call access Once you define these members you can associate them with specific CUGs In the Networks tab...

Страница 714: ...Value Enter the CUG member rule using the guidelines in About CUG Member Rules on page 19 2 Do not enter more than 15 characters for an E 164 address or more than 14 characters for an X 121 address Type Select X 121 E 164 or AESA Access Incoming IA This attribute specifies how incoming calls from non CUG users or users of a different CUG are handled Select the check box to accept calls from users ...

Страница 715: ...the following configuration limits Up to 1024 CUGs per switch are supported You can assign up to 128 members per CUG You can assign each member to as many as 16 CUGs To create a CUG 1 In the Networks tab expand the network you are managing 2 Expand the SVC Security node 3 Right click on the CUGs node and click Add on the pop up menu as shown in Figure 19 4 Figure 19 4 Defining a CUG The Add CUG di...

Страница 716: ...oming Call Barred Specifies how incoming calls from the same CUG are handled Select the check box to reject calls from users of the same CUG Clear the check box default to allow calls from users of the same CUG Outgoing Call Barred Specifies how outgoing calls to the same CUG are handled Select the check box to block calls to users of the same CUG Clear the check box default to allow calls to user...

Страница 717: ...our network cannot be compromised by unauthorized SVC access This chapter contains Configuration Overview on page 20 1 Administrative Tasks on page 20 8 Configuration Overview This section provides background information and configuration guidelines for managing Port Security Screening This section contains About Port Security Screening on page 20 2 Implementing Port Security Screening on page 20 ...

Страница 718: ...e a maximum of 16 different screens per port Using these screens the port checks every SVC it receives and or sends for the matching criteria specified in the screen s If the SVC meets the matching criteria specified in at least one of these screens the port either passes or blocks that SVC according to the security screen design Implementing Port Security Screening Although you can apply multiple...

Страница 719: ... screens assigned to this port blocks the SVC Block If you set the Ingress Screen Mode to Default Screen all incoming SVCs to this port are blocked if it is set to All Screens all incoming SVCs are blocked unless one of the ingress security screens assigned to this port passes the SVC Egress Screen Mode All Screens All egress screens you apply to this port are used to determine whether an outgoing...

Страница 720: ...y either an E 164 or X 121 style address for calling or called addresses or an NSAP AESA style address for calling or called subaddresses You can enter the entire address as a number or enter a UNIX style expression using wildcards When you use a UNIX expression a single screen can match multiple endpoint addresses Use the wildcard to replace a single digit or the wildcard to replace one or more d...

Страница 721: ...ased on The combined effect of the default screens specified for the logical port The security screens you assign to that port The matching address criteria defined in each screen if applicable If you set the ingress egress screen mode to Default Screens the port does not check SVCs for the matching criteria specified in an assigned security screen It takes the action either pass or block specifie...

Страница 722: ...e port to screen SVCs based on the ingress security screens you assign 2 Create and assign two security screens The following screen passes all incoming 1800 SVCs The following screen blocks all SVCs from the 234 exchange Ingress Screen Mode All Screens Default Ingress Screen Block Screen Name pass_in_800 SVC Direction Ingress Screen Type Pass Calling Address Ignore Calling Subaddress Ignore Calle...

Страница 723: ...n for a logical port This default mode determines whether to pass or block SVCs from certain addresses The previous example blocks all incoming SVCs for the logical port You can quickly revert back to the default mode if necessary Configure and assign the security screen exceptions The previous example passes all incoming 1800 SVCs Configure and assign any exceptions to these screens The previous ...

Страница 724: ...ate a set of security screens see Creating Port Security Screen Definitions on page 20 8 4 Define the logical port security screening defaults If necessary assign the security screens that provide exceptions to these defaults see Assigning Security Screens to Logical Ports on page 20 10 Creating Port Security Screen Definitions To create a security screen 1 In the Networks tab expand the network y...

Страница 725: ...ose one of the following buttons Ingress default Screen incoming SVCs Egress Screen outgoing SVCs Type Select the Type of screen This determines the action this screen performs Choose one of the following buttons Block default Blocks all SVCs that match the criteria Pass Passes all SVCs that match the criteria Calling Address Configure the Calling Address Type Select the address type from the pull...

Страница 726: ...address Configure the Calling Subaddress This parameter provides an optional level of screening Type Select AESA from the pull down list Select Ignore default if the screen does not use this parameter Address Enter the address screen up to 40 characters using the guidelines in About Security Screen Addresses on page 20 4 Called Address Configure the Called Address Type Select the address type from...

Страница 727: ...k on the LPort you want to configure and select Security from the pop up menu as shown in Figure 20 3 Figure 20 3 Assigning a Security Screen to a Logical Port The Activate and Assign Security Screen dialog box appears Figure 20 4 Figure 20 4 Activate and Assign Security Screen Default Screen Tab 3 Select the Default Screen tab in the Activate and Assign Security Screen dialog box and complete the...

Страница 728: ...ecify what action the Default ingress security screen will take when the Ingress Screen mode is set to Default Screen Pass All incoming SVCs to this port are passed default Block All incoming SVCs to this port are blocked Egress Screen Mode Choose one of the following buttons to specify what type of egress security screens will be used Default Screen Disables default the egress security screens ap...

Страница 729: ...x select the Assigned Screens tab Figure 20 5 and use the arrow buttons to assign available screens to the logical port Figure 20 5 Activate and Assign Security Screen Assigned Screens Tab 5 Select the Activate Status check box for each assigned screen if you want to screen SVCs according to the rules of the screen 6 When you finish activating and assigning screens choose OK to return to the Navis...

Страница 730: ...Beta Draft Confidential 20 141 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Port Security Screening Administrative Tasks ...

Страница 731: ...ng and signaling see the ATM Forum Technical Committee Private Network Network Interface Specification Version 1 0 af pnni 0055 000 available from the ATM Forum s Web site http www atmforum com This chapter describes the following topics and tasks Supported PNNI Features on page 21 2 PNNI Routing Protocol Overview on page 21 8 PNNI Signaling Overview on page 21 14 Integrating VNN OSPF and PNNI Net...

Страница 732: ...is and previous releases of Lucent NavisCore and switch code These features are PNNI 1 0 compliant Table 21 1 Supported PNNI Features Feature Navis EMS CBGX 9 3 0 0 CBX 3500 9 3 0 0 GX 9 1 1 0 CBX 9 1 1 0 CBX GX PVC VNN Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y SPVC VNN Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y Hierarchical PNNI 3 Levels Y 4 Levels Y PNNI VNN Integration Y PSAX Integration Flat PNNI N Hierarchical PNNI N UBR Load Balancing VNN ...

Страница 733: ...Y PNNI Y Mixeda N Frame ATM Interworking PVC VNN Frame Frame Y ATM Frame Y Frame ATM Y PVC PNNI Frame Frame Y ATM Frame Y Frame ATM Y PVC Mixeda Frame Frame Y ATM Frame Y Frame ATM Y SPVC VNN Frame Frame Y ATM Frame Y Frame ATM Y ATM ATM Y SPVC PNNI Frame Frame Y ATM Frame Y Table 21 1 Supported PNNI Features Continued Feature Navis EMS CBGX 9 3 0 0 CBX 3500 9 3 0 0 GX 9 1 1 0 CBX 9 1 1 0 ...

Страница 734: ...TM Y SPVC Mixeda Frame Frame Y ATM Frame Y Frame ATM Y SVC VNN Frame Frame Y ATM Frame N Frame ATM Y SVC PNNI Frame Frame N ATM Frame N Frame ATM N SVC Mixeda Frame Frame N ATM Frame N Frame ATM N Resilient UNI VNN Y PNNIb Y VNN PNNIb Y PNNI VNNb Y VNN PNNI VNNb N Table 21 1 Supported PNNI Features Continued Feature Navis EMS CBGX 9 3 0 0 CBX 3500 9 3 0 0 GX 9 1 1 0 CBX 9 1 1 0 ...

Страница 735: ...PNNI VNN PNNIb Y Automatic Protection Switching APS VNN Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y Connection Trace VNNc N PNNI Y Mixeda Y Path Trace VNNc Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y Layer 2 VPN VNN Y PNNId Y Mixeda c Y Circuit Definted Path VNN Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y FRF 5 VNN Y PNNI Y Table 21 1 Supported PNNI Features Continued Feature Navis EMS CBGX 9 3 0 0 CBX 3500 9 3 0 0 GX 9 1 1 0 CBX 9 1 1 0 ...

Страница 736: ...ity Frame VNN Y PNNIe N Mixeda d N Multilink Frame Relay MLFR VNN Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y Resilient Link Management Interface RLMI VNN Y PNNI N Mixeda N Redirect PVC VNN Y PNNI N Mixeda N Point Multipoint PVC VNN Y PNNI Y Mixeda Y Circuit List VNN Trunk Y PNNI Trunk Y Table 21 1 Supported PNNI Features Continued Feature Navis EMS CBGX 9 3 0 0 CBX 3500 9 3 0 0 GX 9 1 1 0 CBX 9 1 1 0 ...

Страница 737: ...rk configurations with Virtual Network Navigator VNN PNNI combined setups including VNN PNNI PNNI VNN VNN PNNI VNN and PNNI VNN PNNI b Service Name Binding is not supported on PNNI links c Connection Trace is not applicable on VNN only networks d Policy based routing is used on PNNI and mixed VNN PNNI networks e PNNI and mixed networks do not support the Priority Frame feature Table 21 1 Supported...

Страница 738: ...f the switch For more information about these PNNI node parameters see Configuring PNNI Node Parameters on page 21 43 Hierarchical Organization Peer groups can be organized hierarchically To accomplish a hierarchical organization of peer groups each peer group is represented to the next level of hierarchy by an abstract entity called a logical group node LGN A node in the child peer group called t...

Страница 739: ...e next highest peer group in the hierarchy which can be made up of other parents that is LGNs representing other child peer groups In turn the members of the next highest peer group in the hierarchy choose a PGL which summarizes information to the LGN in the hierarchical chain forming multiple peer group levels LGN LGN Legend N Lowest level Node LGN Logical Group Node PG Peer Group PG1 PG5 PG7 PGL...

Страница 740: ...o be a member of PG3 A node s membership within the hierarchy is determined by the network configuration In other words the network administrator configures the hierarchical structure Neighboring nodes LGN or lowest level node within a peer group exchange information to synchronize their topology databases The topology database contains information about the peer group in which a node resides and ...

Страница 741: ...NI allows network nodes to automatically learn the topology of the network and use the topological knowledge they acquire to route data to its correct destination Figure 21 3 illustrates the flow of PNNI topology information within peer groups and between peer groups The neighboring nodes in each peer group exchange topology information to synchronize each other s topology databases The LGNs also ...

Страница 742: ...acket to another neighbor the other neighbor responds with its own database summary packet PTSE Request Packets Contain one or more entries that request PTSEs When a node examines received database summary packets from neighbors and detects one or more missing PTSEs in its topology database it builds a PTSE request packet This packet contains a list of IDs that identify the missing PTSEs The node ...

Страница 743: ...provide the resources requested by the call The following examples describe how PNNI administrative weight configurations can function in a PNNI network Suppose that variable bit rate real time VBR RT traffic has two available paths for reaching a given destination One path has a weight of 1000 while another path has a weight of 4000 The switch will choose the path with the weight of 1000 if the c...

Страница 744: ...n provides a brief overview of PNNI signaling For a detailed explanation of PNNI signaling see the ATM Forum Technical Committee Private Network Network Interface Specification Version 1 0 af pnni 0055 000 available from the ATM Forum s Web site http www atmforum com PNNI signaling allows ATM SVC and soft permanent virtual circuit SPVC calls to be set up across a private network that supports the ...

Страница 745: ...mation dynamically maintained by PNNI routing These routes are calculated as needed from the node s view of the current topology PNNI and CBX GX PVCs Navis EMS CBGX allows for the configuration of CBX GX PVCs through the selection of PVC endpoints node LPort only The optimal circuit path that the PVC traverses is not defined instead the path is chosen dynamically by Lucent internal routing protoco...

Страница 746: ...NN OSPF and PNNI routing protocols on the switch advertise the SPVC node prefix Therefore if the path for an ATM PVC cannot be determined using the traditional VNN routing mechanism the calling node instead will automatically attempt to establish a path to the destination node s SPVC prefix This function allows the use of both PNNI paths and hybrid PNNI VNN paths to establish the ATM PVC When an A...

Страница 747: ...nate in different regional networks you must enable the Import Exterior Addresses field on all PNNI VNN gateway switches Enabling this function allows addresses from one regional network to be automatically routed across the backbone network to other regional networks Once the addresses are imported PNNI and VNN OSPF call interworking automatically routes the ATM calls to the appropriate destinati...

Страница 748: ...isable the node global address sharing variables VNN to PNNI and or PNNI to VNN See Address Sharing in Table 21 4 on page 21 44 for more information on the global variable fields Route Advertisement Suppression You can filter or suppress specific ATM address or prefix advertisements between adjacent VNN OSPF and PNNI routing domains by enabling the Suppress PNNI and or OSPF Advertisement parameter...

Страница 749: ...mum trunk logical ports Note OSPF can interwork Frame UNI or Frame trunk logical ports onto an ATM trunk PNNI can interwork Frame UNI or PPP logical ports onto a PNNI trunk Interworking an OSPF Frame trunk with a PNNI trunk is not currently supported Note The current release does not support Frame Relay to PNNI interworking of SVCs Note This feature does not implement PNNI on the B STDX 9000 switc...

Страница 750: ...basis to newly available links By pacing circuit reroutes Reroute Load Balancing prevents congestion on PNNI links and promotes efficient reuse of network resources PNNI Reroute Load Balancing Criteria PNNI Reroute Load Balancing periodically examines active circuits in round robin order to determine whether a better path through the PNNI routing domain is available If a better path is detected th...

Страница 751: ...tal of 20 circuits The switch then waits 50 seconds before it begins to reroute the next batch of 20 circuits Configuring Circuit Reroute Tuning Parameters To set the tuning parameters 1 Expand the network node to which you want to add or modify a switch a To add a new switch right click on the Switches class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Switch dialog box appears Figure 21 4 No...

Страница 752: ...TDX 9000 Configuring PNNI Routing PNNI Reroute Load Balancing Figure 21 4 Add Switch Dialog Box b To modify an existing switch Expand the Switches class node Select a switch then right click on the switch node Select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Switch dialog box appears Figure 21 5 on page 21 23 ...

Страница 753: ... Load Balancing ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 1 19 0521 23 Figure 21 5 Modify Switch Dialog Box 2 Select the Reroute Tuning tab in the Modify Switch dialog box Figure 21 6 Figure 21 6 Modify Switch Reroute Tuning Tab ...

Страница 754: ...er of circuits from each module that can issue reroute requests in a single batch The default is 1 circuit This value applies to intra area load balancing only The reroute count for inter area load balancing is always set to 1 Reroute Delay 4 32767 sec Enter a value between 4 and 32767 in seconds Choose an even value to enable load balancing or choose an odd value to disable it The reroute delay r...

Страница 755: ...ich the ATM UNI logical port resides for APS APS resilient UNI allows you to protect optical interfaces by provisioning a backup protection port that automatically takes over for the primary working port when a physical layer fault or module failure occurs You configure both resilient UNI and APS resilient UNI by associating a Service Name Binding with the working and protection logical port pair ...

Страница 756: ...f all PNNI reachable names including Type 1 addresses resilient UNI names that are used by PNNI to advertise Service Name Bindings in the network For detailed information about using the show pnni names command see the Console Command User s Reference for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 To Learn About See Resilient UNI Fault Tolerant PVC Configuring Fault Tolerant ATM PVCs Resilient UNI Ch...

Страница 757: ...gories NSCs and that enhanced path selection is performed on resources that match the associated policy constraint Policy based routing allows the network administrator to manage network element resources based on NSCs in addition to ATM Service Categories which are currently available in a PNNI domain network Policy based routing is supported on the following Point to point PVC and SPVC connectio...

Страница 758: ...licy operators and lists of NSCs that may be used to route a connection Policy Constraint an ordered list of one or more policies that must be considered during call routing and call establishment Policy Operator defines how the list of NSCs specified in a policy are used to prune a network topology map allowing or forbidding access to resources during call establishment Supported policy operators...

Страница 759: ...ate Net Overflow option Restricted path selection is performed considering VNN trunks of that partic ular VPN only No other resources are eligible If path selection fails so does the call establishment Non restricted Public path selection is performed considering both VNN trunks of that particular VPN and VNN trunks of VPN 0 The preference is given to VPN trunks However in a PNNI network with poli...

Страница 760: ...nstraint is defined and assigned to this call The policy constraint has the following policy constraints Translation of a VPN circuit with public overflow disabled require single Ne NSC 20 single Rp NSC 30 Translation of VPN circuit with public overflow enabled require single Ne NSC 20 single Rp NSC 30 and require LOR Ne NSC 20 Ne NSC public LOR Rp NSC 30 bare The call request process on node A1 w...

Страница 761: ...ge carries the policy constraint IE with the IE instruction field set to a proper value The call request process on node A2 PNNI VNN gateway will proceed as follows At the PNNI VNN Gateway based on the policy constraint IE in the SETUP message and possibly pre configured mapping information between Policy Routing and Layer2 VPN the policy constraint included is translated back to a Layer 2 VPN inf...

Страница 762: ...h you want to add a VPN 2 Right click on the VPNs class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add VPN dialog box appears Figure 21 8 Note The steps to configure a pure VNN network using a Layer 2 VPN can be found in Chapter 13 Configuring Layer 2 VPNs If your network already contains Layer 2 VPNs prior to upgrading to this release the circuits on these VPNs do not need to be reconfigured St...

Страница 763: ...9 0521 33 Figure 21 8 Add VPN Dialog Box 3 Select the General tab 4 To set the policy routing attributes select the Set PNNI Policy Routing Attributes check box 5 Complete the fields in the General tab of the Add VPN dialog box as described in Table 21 3 Note Navis EMS CBGX will not allow you to add different policies with the same Ne NSC or Rp NSC values ...

Страница 764: ...ify the policy Network Entity NSC to be used in a policy constraint for a policy routed call on this VPN Rp NSC 1 65535 Enter a number to identify the Resource Partition NSC to be used in a policy constraint for a policy routed call on this VPN If the Is Public NeNSC button is set to Yes the Rp NSC field will be unavailable Is Public NeNSC Choose Yes to allow this Ne NSC to be a public Ne NSC This...

Страница 765: ...tes select the Set PNNI Policy Routing Attributes check box 3 Fill in the Modify VPN fields as described in Table 21 3 on page 21 34 4 When you are done modifying fields choose OK to save the changes The Modify VPN dialog box closes Associate VPN PNNI Policy Mapping With Switch Once a VPN PNNI policy mapping is created this policy mapping must be associated with a switch before using that VPN in c...

Страница 766: ...he Switches class node and select the switch 3 Right click on the switch node and select Associate VPN Policy to Switch from the pop up menu The Associate Policy Mapping to Switch dialog box appears Figure 21 10 Figure 21 10 Associate Policy Mapping to Switch Dialog Box The lefthand column in the dialog box lists the policy mappings that are defined on the network The righthand column lists the po...

Страница 767: ...with an NNI logical port 1 Expand the Switches class node and double click on the instance node for the switch on which you want to configure the PNNI logical port The switch object tree tab appears in the Navigation Panel 2 Perform one of the following sets of steps depending on your configuration To define the logical port for a GX 550 OC 48c STM 16c module a Expand the BIO C card node then expa...

Страница 768: ...the PNNI parameters 5 Select the Set PNNI Policy Routing Attributes check box if it s not already selected IMA group 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 IMA IOM 1 Expand the 3 port Channelized DS3 ATM IMA instance node then expand the PPorts class node 2 Expand the IMA Groups class node then the IMA group instance node 3 port Channelized DS3 1 ATM w IMA Enhanced IOM 1 port Channelized STM 1 E1 IMA IOM 1 Port...

Страница 769: ... and save the settings To modify an existing logical port choose Modify from the logical port instance node pull down menu and follow steps 4 7 above Configure Policy based Circuits After associating a policy mapping with the switch when the operator configures a VPN Policy circuit Navis EMS CBGX will display only those associated policies along with standard VPNs in the Choose VPN Policy dialog b...

Страница 770: ...the call will try to be routed through the public VPN To configure policy based circuits 1 In the switch object tree tab in the Navigation Panel expand the circuits class node and double click on the PVC class node on which you want to configure the PNNI policy 2 Select a circuit from the list then right click on it 3 From the pull down menu choose L2 VPN Customer Info The Choose VPN Policy dialog...

Страница 771: ...g for your network Step 1 Enable Name LSA Flooding on the switch page 21 42 Step 2 Configure PNNI Node Parameters page 21 43 Step 3 Configure ATM NNI Logical Ports page 21 50 Step 4 Configure SVC port addresses for SVCs and SPVCs page 17 55 Step 5 Configure ATM PVCs page 10 1 configure SVC SPVC parameters page 17 1 configure SPVCs page 18 1 Step 6 Configure Management PVCs page 11 4 or Management ...

Страница 772: ...I and VNN switches can communicate To enable Name LSA flooding on a CBX 3500 CBX 500 or GX 550 switch 1 Expand the network node where the switch resides 2 Expand the Switches class node 3 Right click on the switch node and select Modify from the pop up menu The Modify Switch dialog box appears Figure 21 5 on page 21 23 4 Select the PNNI Name Translation check box to enable flooding of NAME 3 and S...

Страница 773: ...meters for each switch that supports PNNI in the network Adding PNNI Node Parameters To configure PNNI node information for up to eight node instances for the switch you select 1 Expand the instance node for the switch to which you want to add a PNNI node 2 Right click on the PNNI Nodes class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add PNNI Node dialog box appears Figure 21 13 Figure 21 13 Ad...

Страница 774: ...decreases resulting in smaller peer group identifiers For example a node that is the grandparent of a peer group two levels lower will have fewer bits reserved for its peer group identifier than its grandchildren As a result the grandparent will have a smaller peer group identifier than the peer group identifier of its grandchildren Identifier in Hex Enter in hexidecimal format the identifier of t...

Страница 775: ...8 Enter a value from zero default to eight that identifies the node that will represent this peer group at the next higher level of the PNNI hierarchy if the node becomes peer group leader A value greater than zero 0 indicates this entry has a parent node Values greater than eight are invalid Note When you configure the LGN the parent node index of the child entry must be set to the index of the L...

Страница 776: ... only to switches that have both VNN OSPF and PNNI trunks Check the box to advertise the PNNI address within the VNN domain Clear the box so that the PNNI address is not advertised within the VNN domain If this checkbox is empty for a gateway switch this prevents addresses from being advertised from PNNI to VNN routing domains Enable Address Bundle Select the check box to support bundling addresse...

Страница 777: ... Note To prevent advertisement or call setup looping the following safeguards are built into address exportation Addresses can be dynamically advertised across a maximum of three separate routing domains An address is not exported to a neighboring routing domain if that address is already defined as an interior reachable address within that domain These safeguards cannot be disabled Node Link Bw F...

Страница 778: ...gation within a given peer group To add a new address prefix to be advertised by higher level PNNI LGNs 1 Complete the steps in Configuring PNNI Node Parameters on page 21 43 2 Right click on the PNNI node address instance node and select Configure PNNI Summary Address from the pop up menu The Configure Pnni Address Summary dialog box appears Figure 21 14 Figure 21 14 Configure Pnni Address Summar...

Страница 779: ...the summary address is inside the PNNI routing domain Exterior Indicates the summary address is outside the PNNI routing domain Address Enter the summary address up to 19 octets The summary address is an address prefix that indicates how the node summarizes reachability information This field is padded to the right with 0s zeros if you enter fewer than 19 bytes Bit Len Enter the length in bits of ...

Страница 780: ...subport instance node 3 Right click on the LPorts class node and select Add from the pop up menu The Add Logical Port dialog box appears Figure 21 15 4 In the LPort Name field enter a unique alphanumeric name for the logical port 5 In the LPort Type field select ATM NNI from the pull down list 6 Use the instructions in Table 21 6 to set the logical port attributes Table 21 6 Configuring an ATM NNI...

Страница 781: ...work interfaces along a path are added up and switches choose the path with the lowest cumulative weight when making routing decisions For example suppose that VBR RT traffic has two available paths for reaching a given destination one path has a weight of 1000 and the other path has a weight of 4000 If the call requests VBR RT QoS and administrative weight as a metric and if the path has sufficie...

Страница 782: ...s of different outside links are not equal and nonzero each will be advertised in a separate horizontal link PTSE by the associated parent LGN nodes Note The aggregation token value is important only for outside links where the neighboring nodes belong in different peer groups Override Default for Forward Select the check box to specify the forward traffic descriptor TD for PNNI routing control ch...

Страница 783: ...ot admin down the logical port Set PNNI Policy Routing Attributes Select this check box to configure the policy routing attributes for this logical port Clear the check box default if you do not want to set the policy routing attributes Ne NSC 1 65535 Enter a number between 1 and 65535 to identify the policy Network Entity NSC to be advertised for this VPN Rp NSC 1 65535 Enter a number between 1 a...

Страница 784: ...e PVCs For information about configuring Lucent ATM PVCs see Chapter 10 Configuring ATM PVCs PVCs can be established with endpoints that are any combination of ATM UNI Frame Relay UNI or PPP logical ports Configuring SVC and SPVC Parameters PNNI routing can connect your network of switches using SVCs instead of PVCs Once you have configured the ATM NNI logical ports you configure SVC prefixes or a...

Страница 785: ...o Point Offnet Circuit Connection on page 18 6 Configuring MPVCs A management PVC MPVC can be used for all applications involving a switch and an attached NMS or IP host An MPVC is a PVC between the UNI or NNI logical port to which the NMS or IP host connects and the processor module on the remote switch The switch that connects the NMS or IP host is not burdened by the traffic traversing the MPVC...

Страница 786: ...Navis EMS CBGX See Chapter 10 in the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 for more information PNNI Trap Support Lucent switches can receive PNNI traps that report status changes in PNNI protocol states See Chapter 14 Monitoring Traps and Appendix A Trap Alarm Condition Messages in the Switch Diagnostics User s Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 900...

Страница 787: ...cation for the circuit s QoS class This bandwidth allocation depends on the specified CAC implementation the circuit s QoS class and the circuit s specified traffic descriptor TD If you try to create a circuit that causes the allocated bandwidth for a given QoS class to exceed the bandwidth available for that class the circuit will not be created The CAC configuration option enables you to choose ...

Страница 788: ...ion Also the QoS for VBR NRT is not guaranteed when you use the customize VBR NRT and ABR CAC implementation Note Before tuning the Lucent CAC or configuring a customized CAC you should closely monitor your network to achieve a good understanding of the network s traffic profile Be conservative when you adjust the CAC to ensure QoS After you make adjustments monitor the network closely to determin...

Страница 789: ... physical port factor entered as a percentage and F2 is the SCR scale factor entered as a percentage You can configure only an F1 factor only an F2 factor or both factors If you do not configure one of these factors then the value of that factor is by default 100 Customizable CAC Example A circuit request is made and the circuit needs to reserve bandwidth based on an SCR of 10 000 cells per second...

Страница 790: ...Switch instance node for the switch for which you want to adjust the CAC and select Set CAC Parameters from the pop up menu The Set All CAC Parameters dialog box appears Figure A 1 Figure A 1 Set All CAC Parameters Dialog Box 2 Select one of the following CAC Type field options from the pull down list Lucent Enables you to tune the CLR and CDV only See Tuning the CAC on page A 5 for more informati...

Страница 791: ...ower of ten 1 0e For example if you enter 5 your CLR objective is a maximum of one dropped cell for every 100 000 cells If the CAC determines that the creation of a circuit on a physical port will cause more than one in 100 000 cells to be dropped then the circuit will not be created on that physical port By default VBR Real Time is set to 9 1 in 1 000 000 000 and VBR Non Real Time is set to 6 1 i...

Страница 792: ...ou finish choose OK to send the values you entered to the selected switch You will need to perform a PRAM Sync for the CAC to be updated in the switch configuration Note Keep in mind that since both the CDV and CLR calculations are non linear in nature the resulting equivalent bandwidth for VBR RT and VBR NRT circuits may not be the same as it was in previous releases Since the circuits might end ...

Страница 793: ...x Figure A 1 on page A 4 select Customized VBRrt VBRnrt and ABR in the CAC Type field 2 In the Port Scale Factors field enter a scale factor percentage to use for computing bandwidth requirements on the physical port For example if you enter a value of 125 in the DS3 field a circuit that would normally reserve bandwidth based on an SCR of 10 000 CPS would be allocated bandwidth of 12 500 CPS 3 To ...

Страница 794: ...ved You can specify up to ten upper limits The following list shows several examples This would give you the following ranges of SCR values Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 10 000 10 000 8 000 20 000 16 000 12 000 35 000 20 000 15 000 24 000 20 000 28 000 25 000 35 000 30 000 35 000 Range Example 1 Example 2 Example 3 1 0 10 000 0 10 000 0 8 000 2 10 001 20 000 10 001 16 000 8 001 12 000 3 20 001 35 ...

Страница 795: ...f you enter a value of 125 a circuit with an SCR of 12 000 CPS would be allocated a bandwidth of 15 000 CPS assuming you did not define physical port scale factors d In the Maximum MBS column enter an MBS value that defines the MBS value allowed for each range of SCR values For example if you enter an MBS value of 256 for the range of SCR values 0 10000 a circuit with an SCR of 7 000 CPS and MBS o...

Страница 796: ...e A 1 on page A 4 select Customized VBRnrt and ABR in the CAC Type field 2 See Tuning the CAC on page A 5 to enter the desired values for the CLR and CDV objectives 3 See Customizing the CAC for VBR RT VBR NRT and ABR on page A 7 to enter the desired values in the Port Scale Factors and SCR Limit Scale Factors fields 4 When you finish choose OK to send these values to the selected switch You will ...

Страница 797: ...traffic conditions When you create either a PVC or a point to multipoint PMP circuit you select one of several TD combinations The traffic descriptor combination specifies which traffic parameters are used for traffic control It also determines the number and type of cells that are admitted into a congested queue and whether or not high priority cells are tagged as low priority cells when traffic ...

Страница 798: ...n different situations if you select this option This example assumes you set the PCR for CLP 0 to 50 000 cells per second CPS and the PCR for CLP 0 1 to 70 000 CPS All values in the table represent the measured traffic rate at a given point in time Table B 1 PCR CLP 0 and PCR CLP 0 1 CLP 0 CPS CLP 1 CPS Result 45 000 22 000 The switch does not drop any cells because the CLP 0 and CLP 0 1 streams ...

Страница 799: ...cells sec and the PCR for CLP 0 1 to 70 000 cells sec All values in the table represent the measured traffic rate at a given point in time Table B 2 PCR CLP 0 and PCR CLP 0 1 With Tagging CLP 0 CPS CLP 1 CPS Result 45 000 22 000 The switch does not tag or drop any cells because the CLP 0 and CLP 0 1 streams did not exceed the PCR 50 000 22 000 The switch drops 2 000 CPS because the cell transmissi...

Страница 800: ... the PCR of the CLP 0 1 aggregate cell stream as well as the sustainable cell rate SCR and maximum burst size MBS of the CLP 0 cell stream with no Tagging The cell streams are checked for traffic conformance as follows The switch checks the cell rate of the CLP 0 1 stream the switch drops cells arriving above the PCR The number of CLP 0 and CLP 1 cells dropped is based approximately on the ratio o...

Страница 801: ...p any cells because the stream does not exceed traffic parameters 70 000 40 000 60 The switch drops CLP 0 cells from the aggregate cell stream if the burst tolerance is exceeded The number of cells that are dropped depends on the traffic pattern combination of sustained and burst cells The larger the burst the more cells are dropped 70 000 50 000 30 The switch drops 10 000 CLP 0 CPS because CLP 0 ...

Страница 802: ...he ratio of CLP 0 to CLP 1 cells For example if the ratio of CLP 0 to CLP 1 cells is 8 to 5 approximately 8 CLP 0 cells are dropped for every 5 CLP 1 cells that are dropped The switch checks the SCR and the MBS of the CLP 0 stream If the stream exceeds SCR cells arriving above the SCR are admitted until the stream exceeds tolerance for such cells Tolerance is based on the MBS PCR and CDVT The swit...

Страница 803: ...e cell stream are tagged if the burst tolerance is exceeded The number of cells that are tagged depends on the traffic pattern combination of sustained and burst cells The larger the burst the more cells are tagged 70 000 50 000 30 The switch tags as many as 10 000 CLP 0 CPS because CLP 0 exceeds the SCR It may tag additional cells because the cell burst of 30 cells at PCR combined with the sustai...

Страница 804: ...example if the ratio of CLP 0 to CLP 1 cells is 8 to 5 approximately 8 CLP 0 cells are dropped for every 5 CLP 1 cells that are dropped The switch checks the SCR and the MBS of the CLP 0 1 stream If the stream exceeds SCR cells arriving above the SCR are admitted until the stream exceeds tolerance for such cells Tolerance is based on the MBS PCR and CDVT The switch drops cells that arrive above th...

Страница 805: ...aggregate cell stream if the burst tolerance is exceeded The number of cells that are dropped depends on the traffic pattern combination of sustained and burst cells The larger the burst the more cells are dropped 70 000 50 000 30 The switch drops 10 000 CLP 0 1 CPS because CLP 0 1 exceeds the SCR It may drop additional cells because the cell burst of 30 cells at PCR combined with the sustained tr...

Страница 806: ...B 101 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 ATM Traffic Descriptors PCR CLP 0 1 SCR CLP 0 1 and MBS CLP 0 1 Beta Draft Confidential ...

Страница 807: ...n you install two IOMs on the same SP fabric thread Even with this thread bandwidth enforcement you may still oversubscribe the VBR and UBR service classes on some or all of the IOM ports to utilize the statistical multiplexing gains that are an inherent part of running with two IOMs on one SP thread However you should carefully plan such oversubscription according to the intended service offering...

Страница 808: ...Shared SP Thread Example When a switch has two IOMs installed on an SP thread you will notice the NMS enforcement of the SP thread bandwidth whenever you attempt to provision two OC 3 STM1 cards on the same SP fabric thread As you provision logical ports the NMS subtracts the assigned bandwidth from the 599 040 Mbps total After you provision four OC 3 STM1 logical ports on the first OC 3 STM1 card...

Страница 809: ...rofile Tables on page 5 15 About FCP Rate Profile Tables You can provision FCP rate profile tables in four separate files You then use Navis EMS CBGX to download these files to the ATM FCP See Downloading Buffer Threshold and Rate Profile Tables on page 6 8 for more information The FCP rate profile tables include Rate Increase Exponent RIE Rate Decrease Exponent RDE Local Discard Threshold Local C...

Страница 810: ...irtual circuit VC you configure 1 Find the MCR class based on the module configuration as explained in MCR Class Mappings on page D 4 2 Use the MCR class found in step 1 to find the FCP rate profile table values Table D 1 shows the default FCP profile values Table D 1 FCP Rate Profile Values by MCR Class MCR Class Local Discard Threshold in Cells Local Congestion Threshold in Cells RIE RDE 0 32 16...

Страница 811: ... dat opt Mako9 3 NavisEMS CBGX Database CascadeView etc cvRdf dat c Edit the default rate profile tables to include your customized values and save your edits d Using the Load Rate Profile Tables dialog box Figure 6 3 on page 6 9 download the edited rate profile table files to the FCP See Downloading Buffer Threshold and Rate Profile Tables on page 6 8 for instructions Note It is important to crea...

Страница 812: ...10 OC 12 STM 4 IOM MCR Class Mapping on page D 14 DS3 E3 IOM MCR Class Mapping Table D 2 shows the MCR ranges and corresponding MCR classes for DS3 E3 IOMs Table D 2 DS3 E3 IOM MCR Class Mapping MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class 100 127 3 544 575 17 992 1023 31 128 159 4 576 607 18 1024 1055 32 160 191 5 608 639 19 1056 1087 33 192 223 6 640 671 20 1088 1119 34 224 255 7 ...

Страница 813: ...7 1792 1823 56 3200 3263 82 5632 5759 108 1824 1855 57 3264 3327 83 5760 5887 109 1856 1887 58 3328 3391 84 5888 6015 110 1888 1919 59 3392 3455 85 6016 6143 111 1920 1951 60 3456 3519 86 6144 6271 112 1952 1983 61 3520 3583 87 6272 6399 113 1984 2015 62 3584 3647 88 6400 6527 114 2016 2047 63 3648 3711 89 6528 6655 115 2048 2111 64 3712 3775 90 6656 6783 116 2112 2175 65 3776 3839 91 6784 6911 11...

Страница 814: ...160 29696 30207 186 9984 10239 135 16896 17407 161 30208 30719 187 10240 10495 136 17408 17919 162 30720 31231 188 10496 10751 137 17920 18431 163 31232 31743 189 10752 11007 138 18432 18943 164 31744 32255 190 11008 11263 139 18944 19455 165 32256 32767 191 11264 11519 140 19456 19967 166 32768 33791 192 11520 11775 141 19968 20479 167 33792 34815 193 11776 12031 142 20480 20991 168 34816 35839 1...

Страница 815: ...3 205 59392 60415 218 79872 81919 231 47104 48127 206 60416 61439 219 81920 83967 232 48128 49151 207 61440 62463 220 83968 86015 233 49152 50175 208 62464 63487 221 86016 88063 234 50176 51199 209 63488 64511 222 88064 90111 235 51200 52223 210 64512 65535 223 90112 92159 236 52224 53247 211 65536 67583 224 92160 94207 237 53248 54271 212 67584 69631 225 94208 96000 238 54272 55295 213 69632 7167...

Страница 816: ...e CBX 3500 3 Port Channelized DS3 1 Enhanced IMA module see IMA Group Configuration on page D 18 Table D 3 T1 E1 IOM MCR Class Mapping MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class 100 111 6 480 495 30 864 879 54 112 127 7 496 511 31 880 895 55 128 143 8 512 527 32 896 911 56 144 159 9 528 543 33 912 927 57 160 175 10 544 559 34 928 943 58 176 191 11 560 575 35 944 959 59 192 207 12 ...

Страница 817: ... 1599 81 2240 2303 99 3456 3519 118 1600 1631 82 2304 2367 100 3520 3583 119 1632 1663 83 2368 2431 101 3584 3647 120 1664 1695 84 2432 2495 102 3648 3711 121 1696 1727 85 2496 2559 103 3712 3775 122 1728 1759 86 2560 2623 104 3776 3839 123 1760 1791 87 2624 2687 105 3840 3903 124 1792 1823 88 2688 2751 106 3904 3967 125 1824 1855 89 2752 2815 107 3968 4031 126 1856 1887 90 2816 2879 108 4032 4095...

Страница 818: ... 53 768 895 6 3840 3967 30 6912 7039 54 896 1023 7 3968 4095 31 7040 7167 55 1024 1151 8 4096 4223 32 7168 7295 56 1152 1279 9 4224 4351 33 7296 7423 57 1280 1407 10 4352 4479 34 7424 7551 58 1408 1535 11 4480 4607 35 7552 7679 59 1536 1663 12 4608 4735 36 7680 7807 60 1664 1791 13 4736 4863 37 7808 7935 61 1792 1919 14 4864 4991 38 7936 8063 62 1920 2047 15 4992 5119 39 8064 8191 63 2048 2175 16 ...

Страница 819: ...040 23551 109 39936 40959 135 13312 13567 84 23552 24063 110 40960 41983 136 13568 13823 85 24064 24575 111 41984 43007 137 13824 14079 86 24576 25087 112 43008 44031 138 14080 14335 87 25088 25599 113 44032 45055 139 14336 14591 88 25600 26111 114 45056 46079 140 14592 14847 89 26112 26623 115 46080 47103 141 14848 15103 90 26624 27135 116 47104 48127 142 15104 15359 91 27136 27647 117 48128 4915...

Страница 820: ... 196608 200703 208 67584 69631 161 116736 118783 185 200704 204799 209 69632 71679 162 118784 120831 186 204800 208895 210 71680 73727 163 120832 122879 187 208896 212991 211 73728 75775 164 122880 124927 188 212992 217087 212 75776 77823 165 124928 126975 189 217088 221183 213 77824 79871 166 126976 129023 190 221184 225279 214 79872 81919 167 129024 131071 191 225280 229375 215 81920 83967 168 1...

Страница 821: ... 05D 13 258048 262143 223 294912 303103 228 335872 344063 233 262144 270335 224 303104 311295 229 344064 352255 234 270336 278527 225 311296 319487 230 352256 353208 235 278528 286719 226 319488 327679 231 286720 294911 227 327680 335871 232 Table D 4 OC 3 STM 1 IOM MCR Class Mapping Continued MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class ...

Страница 822: ...47 53 3072 3583 6 15360 15871 30 27648 28159 54 3584 4095 7 15872 16383 31 28160 28671 55 4096 4607 8 16384 16895 32 28672 29183 56 4608 5119 9 16896 17407 33 29184 29695 57 5120 5631 10 17408 17919 34 29696 30207 58 5632 6143 11 17920 18431 35 30208 30719 59 6144 6655 12 18432 18943 36 30720 31231 60 6656 7167 13 18944 19455 37 31232 31743 61 7168 7679 14 19456 19967 38 31744 32255 62 7680 8191 1...

Страница 823: ... 159743 134 52224 53247 83 92160 94207 109 159744 163839 135 53248 54271 84 94208 96255 110 163840 167935 136 54272 55295 85 96256 98303 111 167936 172031 137 55296 56319 86 98304 100351 112 172032 176127 138 56320 57343 87 100352 102399 113 176128 180223 139 57344 58367 88 102400 104447 114 180224 184319 140 58368 59391 89 104448 106495 115 184320 188415 141 59392 60415 90 106496 108543 116 18841...

Страница 824: ...280 753663 205 262144 270335 160 450560 458751 183 753664 770047 206 270336 278527 161 458752 466943 184 770048 786431 207 278528 286719 162 466944 475135 185 786432 802815 208 286720 294911 163 475136 483327 186 802816 819199 209 294912 303103 164 483328 491519 187 819200 835583 210 303104 311295 165 491520 499711 188 835584 851967 211 311296 319487 166 499712 507903 189 851968 868351 212 319488 ...

Страница 825: ...226 1310720 1343487 232 999424 1015807 221 1146880 1179647 227 1343488 1376255 233 1015808 1032191 222 1179648 1212415 228 1376256 1409023 234 1032192 1048575 223 1212416 1245183 229 1409024 1440000 235 1048576 1081343 224 1245184 1277951 230 1081344 1114111 225 1277952 1310719 231 Table D 5 OC 12 STM 4 IOM MCR Class Mapping Continued MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class MCR Range MCR Class ...

Страница 826: ...these instructions to determine the MCR class 1 Calculate the MCR class using the following formula Table D 6 describes the arguments in the formula 2 When you have calculated the MCR class round the figure up to the nearest integer value Table D 6 IMA Configuration MCR Formula Arguments Argument Description MCR Enter the MCR value for the VC LPortBW Enter the value of bandwidth configured for the...

Страница 827: ...ities attempt to select more optimal network paths during initial circuit setup load balance rerouting and trunk failure recovery Priority routing can provide the following advantages Higher up time for high priority circuits Optimal paths for high priority circuits which results in lower delay Higher capacity to burst past the guaranteed QoS rates for high priority circuits The switch treats prio...

Страница 828: ...dth priority and bumping eligibility settings Specifying Routing Priorities When you configure a logical port s PVC or SVC routing priority you specify the bandwidth priority or level of importance and bumping eligibility of each PVC or SVC in the network To override configured bandwidth priority and bumping eligibility settings for new circuits you must enable default the restricted priority rout...

Страница 829: ...ing new circuits See Configuring SVC Attributes on page 17 2 and User Preference Attributes on page 10 26 for more information about configuring these options Using Restricted Priority Routing Restricted priority routing works in the following additional ways If restricted priority routing is disabled a non real time circuit that has been bumped and has bumping eligibility enabled will become acti...

Страница 830: ...e enabled highest priority or disabled lowest priority 3 Equivalent bandwidth EBW order where higher EBW circuits are chosen first 4 Virtual channel identifier VCI order Trunk failure Recovery VCs always attempt to reroute themselves when a trunk goes down The switch software allows a trunk to reach negative bandwidth for circuits recovering from trunk failure if there is no other available path w...

Страница 831: ... trunk Balance rerouting corrects these conditions by rerouting the circuit to a new path Priority routing modifies the switch balance rerouting functions so that a circuit with a higher bandwidth priority is given an optimal path and the bandwidth used by the lower priority circuits is not considered by the switch For this reason circuits of lower priority may be forced onto a path that is not op...

Страница 832: ... The switch running the priority routing software can detect that Path 1 is entirely populated by the circuits with the bandwidth priority 2 and bumping enabled The switch then forces enough of these circuits priority 2 bumping eligibility enabled from Path 1 to ensure that every trunk in Path 1 has enough bandwidth to satisfy the QoS of the highest priority bandwidth priority zero 0 bumping eligi...

Страница 833: ...that caused them are reported When an error occurs the Abort Retry and Ignore options available to you are sensitive to the endpoint that caused the failure Error information is based on both the endpoint that experiences the SNMP set failure and the type of SNMP set failure Types of failures include time outs usually caused by switch reachability problems and circuit not present conditions usuall...

Страница 834: ...is the higher numbered node Redirect PVC Configuration Designates endpoint switches and cards as Pivot Primary and Secondary Note that for Circuit Add and Modify operations the send order for the SNMP set commands is Primary followed by if successful Secondary and then if successful Pivot For Circuit Delete the send order for the SNMP commands is Pivot followed by if successful Primary and if succ...

Страница 835: ...itch unreachable lower numbered node Redirect PVC Primary or Secondary switch unreachable The SNMP request timed out 1st or Primary or Secondary endpoint identified Abort Discontinue attempt to add circuit NMS database switches and out of sync status unmodified Retry Attempt to add circuit again Standard PVC 2nd switch unreachable higher numbered node Redirect PVC Pivot switch unreachable The SNMP...

Страница 836: ...pt to add the circuit again Dangling circuit on 1st or Primary or Secondary switch will not interfere with the Retry Standard PVC Circuit not present on 2nd switch higher numbered node Redirect PVC Circuit not present on the Pivot switch There is no such variable name in this MIB possibly the card is down or not present specific endpoint not identified Abort Discontinue attempt to add circuit NMS ...

Страница 837: ...switch unreachable lower numbered node Redirect PVC Primary or Secondary switch unreachable The SNMP request timed out 1st or Primary or Secondary endpoint identified Abort Discontinue attempt to modify circuit NMS database switches and out of sync status unmodified Retry Attempt to modify circuit again Standard PVC 2nd switch unreachable higher numbered node Redirect PVC Pivot switch unreachable ...

Страница 838: ...is no such variable name in this MIB possibly the card is down or not present specific endpoint not identified Abort Discontinue attempt to modify circuit NMS database unmodified circuit dangling on 1st or Primary or Secondary switch nothing marked out of sync PRAM sync of endpoint cards will remove circuit modification Retry Attempt to modify the circuit again Begin with 1st or Primary or Seconda...

Страница 839: ...ete the circuit again Standard PVC 2nd switch unreachable lower numbered node Redirect PVC Primary or Secondary switch unreachable The SNMP request timed out 2nd or Primary or Secondary endpoint identified Abort Discontinue attempt to delete circuit NMS database unmodified circuit deleted on 1st or Pivot switch but left dangling on 2nd or Primary or Secondary switch nothing marked out of sync PRAM...

Страница 840: ... Circuit not present on 2nd switch higher numbered node Redirect PVC Circuit not present on Primary or Secondary switch There is no such variable name in this MIB possibly the card is down or not present Specific endpoint not identified Abort Discontinue attempt to delete circuit NMS database unmodified circuit deleted from 1st or Pivot switch but left dangling on 2nd or Primary or Secondary switc...

Страница 841: ...egation enables you to use node and port prefixes to represent many port addresses at remote switches For example if a particular switch has 100 port addresses that start with the same number you can provision that number as a node or port prefix This prefix instead of 100 addresses is then advertised to the remote switch OSPF Names An OSPF name represents any type of node prefix port prefix port ...

Страница 842: ...rk configuration summarizes the drawbacks of the typical approach to address provisioning and describes two ways of using OSPF name aggregation to provision the sample network prefixes and addresses more efficiently Sample Network Addressing Scenario The network scenario in Figure G 1 displays sample configuration and addressing information for Switches 1 2 and 3 These switches can represent any c...

Страница 843: ...e addresses However this approach has the following disadvantages You must manually enter one thousand address values The OSPF creates a separate name for each address Propagating all names in the OSPF database throughout the network would consume a significant amount of memory at the host switch and at remote switches in the network The following sections describe two OSPF name aggregation approa...

Страница 844: ...memory on all the other switches in the network Using switch level name aggregation is a better solution when for example a network has hundreds of port prefixes on a switch and many switches throughout the network OSPF name aggregation at the switch level minimizes the size of the name database by aggregating groups of multiple port prefixes into individual OSPF node prefix names for remote switc...

Страница 845: ...uld route calls to the wrong place The need for similar standards exists when planning data networks that use SVCs For example referring to the sample network scenario shown in Figure G 1 suppose that addresses for both CPE at UNI 1 1 and CPE at UNI 3 started with 978555 You could provision each unique address in the network which would route the calls correctly However this solution would result ...

Страница 846: ...option you can use node prefix name aggregation to create a much smaller OSPF name database thereby saving memory on all of the network switches Using node prefixes for the sample network in Figure G 2 reduces the size of the OSPF name database to the product of the number switches in the network multiplied by the number of node prefixes per switch plus any non aggregated names You can also have m...

Страница 847: ...following text is a sample excerpt from the output for this console command The following highlighted fields represent name LSAs The total number of names in the OSPF database from the local OSPF area name summary LSAs The total number of name summaries received from other OSPF areas The sum of these two numbers must be lower than the limits recommended in the switch SRN If the number exceeds the ...

Страница 848: ...he show ospf names command to view the entire OSPF name database in the network Running this command on the switch you are examining lets you view and count the names that are associated with each switch The following text is a sample excerpt from the output for this console command You can use this command to determine the names that are associated with specific switches The highlighted field dis...

Страница 849: ...This prefix does not follow the hierarchical numbering plan used in the network and as a result the OSPF name associated with it must be advertised to all switches in the network Switch 1 show ospf names Type 2 2 2 2 2 2 Flags 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 0x00000000 Cost 0 0 0 0 0 0 State N A N A N A N A N A N A Name Len Primary Secondaries 508 24 250 3 0 617 24 250 2 0 9...

Страница 850: ...witch 1 The highlighted text indicates that 113 addresses and prefixes are provisioned on this particular card However this number does not translate directly to the number of OSPF names You could have all or many of the provisioned entries aggregated by one or more port or node prefixes For this reason switch and network level monitoring techniques are recommended Switch 1 show pram 3 Configurati...

Страница 851: ...endix contains Adding Customer Names on page H 1 Associating a Logical Port With a Customer Name on page H 3 Using the Layer2 Customer VPN View Feature on page H 4 You can configure the Customer Names feature with or without the use of a virtual private network VPN For more information on using Customer Names with VPNs see Chapter 13 Configuring Layer 2 VPNs Adding Customer Names To add customer n...

Страница 852: ...Customer The Add Customer dialog box appears Figure H 2 Figure H 2 Add Customer Dialog Box 4 Enter a customer Name in the Name field 5 Enter a value from 1 to 65535 in the Customer ID field 6 Optional Enter the phone number contact information and any additional comments in the appropriate fields 7 Select Public default from the VPN Name field s pull down list 8 Choose OK ...

Страница 853: ...r GX Logical Ports Once you configure a logical port use the following steps to associate it with a customer name 1 In the Switch tab expand the LPorts node and right click on the logical port you want to assign 2 Select L2 VPN Customer Info from the pop up menu as shown in Figure H 3 Figure H 3 Assigning a Logical Port to a Layer 2 VPN Customer Name The Choose VPN Policy dialog box appears Figure...

Страница 854: ...sy to identify those logical ports that belong to the customer When you create PVCs with the Layer2 VPN Customer View feature enabled the Select End Logical Ports dialog box only displays the logical ports that belong to the customer you selected To use the Layer2 Customer VPN View feature 1 Right click on the instance node of the network to which you want to assign a Layer2 VPN and customer name ...

Страница 855: ...ied of the existence of alarm conditions The actions taken as a result of the failure condition depends on whether the CE service is structured or unstructured Basically trunk conditioning involves sending a user selectable Idle Code and ABCD trunk conditioning code in the DS0 time slot of a multi frame The user sets the data and signaling values via the NMS when configuring the structured line Bo...

Страница 856: ...e downstream signal trunk conditioning is carried out per DS0 bundle in the downstream direction and a remote alarm identification RAI is sent in the upstream direction Table I 1 Trunk Conditioning Recommended Tx and Rx Values Field Value Default Tx Conditioning Data 0 to 0xFF 0x7F Tx Conditioning Signal 0 to 0xF 0 Tx Conditioning Mode 1 None 2 Data and Signaling 3 Data 4 Signaling 2 Data and Sign...

Страница 857: ...0x7F and signaling values ABCD as 1010 to be sent in downstream direction Note Tx and Rx conditioning modes are independent of each other Table I 2 Example of Trunk Conditioning Values in Downstream Direction Field Value Configuration Value Tx Conditioning Data 0 to 0xFF 0x7F Tx Conditioning Signal 0 to 0xF 0xA Tx Conditioning Mode 1 None 2 Data and Signaling 3 Data 4 Signalling 2 Data and Signali...

Страница 858: ...e Rx Force Conditioning Mode must be set to any value other than None For example if user is doing diagnostic testing in the upstream direction then the Tx Force Conditioning Mode must be set to data and signaling see Table I 4 and when the port Admin Status is set to down the configured data and signaling values are forced on to the line This causes the line to be overwritten with 0xFF in data an...

Страница 859: ... AIS random early discard RED or RAI alarm Only performance monitoring PM related parameters are updated Similarly if an AIS is received in the upstream data from the ATM cloud it is passed in the upstream direction without any change If a buffer underflow situation arises because of a fault in the upstream ATM circuit PVC the AIS pattern is transmitted upstream Table I 4 Example of Tx Trunk Condi...

Страница 860: ...I 61 19 05 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 About Trunk Conditioning Beta Draft Confidential ...

Страница 861: ...ed in Lucent documentation Abbreviations The following table lists some of the abbreviations used in Lucent documentation and product specifications Abbreviation Meaning bit binary digit bpi bits per inch bps bits per second CPS cells per second GB gigabyte s Gbps gigabits per second hex hexadecimal Hz hertz cycles per second ID identification i e id est that is in inch es k kilo 1 000 Kb kilobit ...

Страница 862: ...0 and B STDX 9000 Acronyms kg kilogram kHz kilohertz Mb megabit MB megabyte s Mbps megabits per second MHz megahertz min minute s modem modulator demodulator msec millisecond usec microsecond abbreviate with lowercase u for micro sec second vs versus number pound x by multi Abbreviation Meaning ...

Страница 863: ...matic Protection Switching ARP Address Resolution Protocol ASE Autonomous System External ASBR autonomous system border router ASCII American Standard Code for Information Interchange ASR Application Specific Route ATM Asynchronous Transfer Mode ATMoMPLS ATM over MPLS Bc committed burst size BCM backward congestion message Be excess burst size BECN backward explicit congestion notification BER bit...

Страница 864: ...e CI congestion indication CIC carrier identification code CIR committed information rate CLI command line interface CLLM Consolidated Link Layer Management CLP Cell Loss Priority CLR cell loss ratio CP control processor CPE customer premise equipment CRC cyclic redundancy check CSR Customer Specific Route CS Cell Switching or convergence sublayer CSU channel service unit CTD cell transfer delay C...

Страница 865: ...valent bandwidth EFCI explicit forward congestion indication EPD early packet discard ESI end system identifier FCP Flow Control Processor FEAC Far End Alarm and Control FECN forward explicit congestion notification FR Frame Relay FRAD Frame Relay access device FTP File Transfer Protocol FUNI Frame based UNI GFC Generic Flow Control GUI graphical user interface HCS header check sequence HDLC High ...

Страница 866: ...ation element IFNUM interface number IGMP Internet Group Multicast Protocol IISP Interim Inter switch Signaling Protocol ILMI Integrated Layer Management Interface IMA Inverse Multiplexing for ATM I O input output IOA input output adapter IOM input output module IOP input output processor IP Internet Protocol ISDN Integrated Services Digital Network ITU International Telecommunications Union IWU I...

Страница 867: ...ximum burst size MCR minimum cell rate MIB Management Information Base MLFR Multilink Frame Relay MPLS Multi protocol Label Switching MPT Multipoint to Point Tunnel MPVC management permanent virtual circuit MSPVC management soft permanent virtual circuit NDC Network Data Collection Ne Network entity NHRP Next Hop Resolution Protocol Ne NSC Network entity NSC NI no increase NIC Network Interface Ca...

Страница 868: ...nce OCB outgoing calls barred OPTimum Open Packet Trunking OSPF Open Shortest Path First OUI Organizationally Unique Identifier PAD packet assembler disassembler PCM Port Congestion Monitor PCR peak cell rate PDN public data network PDU protocol data unit PE provider edge PG peer group PGL peer group leader PLCP Physical Layer Convergence Protocol PM performance monitoring PMP point to multipoint ...

Страница 869: ...3 pseudo wire edge to edge emulation QoS Quality of Service RADIUS Remote Authentication Dial In User Service RBOC Regional Bell Operating Company RCC routing control channel RDE Rate Decrease Exponent RDF Rate Decrease Factor RED random early discard RFC Request For Comments RIE Rate Increase Exponent RIF Rate Increase Factor RIP Routing Information Protocol RLMI Resilient Link Management Interfa...

Страница 870: ...connection SPVPC soft permanent virtual path connection STM 1 Synchronous Transport Module level 1 STS 1 Synchronous Transport Signal level 1 SVC switched virtual circuit SVCC switched virtual channel connection SVPC switched virtual path connection TAC Technical Assistance Center TCP Transmission Control Protocol TD traffic descriptor TDM timed division multiplexing TE terminal equipment TM timin...

Страница 871: ...al time VC virtual circuit VCC virtual channel connection virtual circuit connection VCI virtual channel identifier virtual circuit identifier VCL virtual circuit link virtual channel link VFR variable frame rate VFR RT NRT variable frame rate real time non real time VNN Virtual Network Navigator VP virtual path VPC virtual path connection VPCI virtual path connection identifier VPI virtual path i...

Страница 872: ...Beta Draft Confidential Acronyms 12 ATM Services Configuration Guide for CBX 3500 CBX 500 GX 550 and B STDX 9000 Acronyms ...

Страница 873: ... 3 20 9 22 cost circuits 10 18 10 51 threshold 10 21 trunks 7 2 7 22 8 45 tasks deleting circuits 10 92 deleting management VPI VCI 2 28 AESA see ATM End System Address AFI see Authority and Format Identifier Allow VFR rt Negative 4 34 Allowed cell rate ACR 5 12 Anycast formats for SVCs 16 2 APS see Automatic protection switching ASE see Autonomous system external Assigning port security screens 2...

Страница 874: ...RT 6 4 multicast cells 5 20 multicast rate 6 5 performance limitations 6 15 queues 5 16 5 18 rate profile tables description of 5 15 determining MCR value D 2 to D 18 downloading 6 8 to 6 10 traffic shaping 5 16 with VP shaping 3 21 ATM Forum UNI 4 0 supported features 2 4 ATM over MPLS 8 1 9 1 architecture 8 8 configuring feeder logical ports 8 16 to 8 34 configuring physical ports 8 14 to 8 15 c...

Страница 875: ...disabling Insertion Mode 17 21 inserting address 17 21 Presentation Mode 17 23 replacing the address 17 25 Screen Mode 17 22 Carry CAS 3 39 Cascade Communications Resource Management CCRM cells defining 3 49 generation 5 9 6 11 termination 5 9 6 12 description of 5 5 Protocol ID 6 4 CBR see Constant bit rate CBX modules ATM Flow Control Processor FCP 5 1 to 6 18 CCRM see Cascade Communications Res...

Страница 876: ... Console Commands modifications for PNNI Resilient UNI APS Resilient UNI 21 41 Constant bit rate CBR 12 3 Control loss threshold CLT enabling 10 21 CRC see cyclic redundancy check CTD see Cell transfer delay CUGs see Closed user groups Custom AESA addresses format of 16 6 Custom AESA port prefixes 17 47 Customer Names customer view feature 13 8 H 4 using a virtual private network VPN 13 2 Customer...

Страница 877: ...5 byte assignments 17 55 definition 16 5 End to End Delay for PVC routing 10 19 10 51 EPD see early packet discard ESI see end system identifier Excess burst size Be 10 56 Explicit forward congestion indication EFCI bit check 6 12 threshold 6 13 Explicit forward congestion indicator EFCI mapping 10 65 Extended QoS parameters 10 32 External device object adding 7 42 External route aggregates VNN OS...

Страница 878: ...ee international country designator ICR see Initial Cell Rate IDI see initial domain identifier Idle VC factor 5 14 IE sig overide mask 17 26 ILMI see Interim Link Management Interface IMA groups minimum cell rate MCR class D 18 Ingress address translation disabling 17 24 tunnelling option 17 24 Initial Cell Rate ICR constant 5 13 5 16 6 4 Initial domain identifier IDI 16 5 Initial domain part IDP...

Страница 879: ...class 4 34 types of B STDX 4 2 types of CBX GX 2 2 Loss threshold ILMI 2 5 3 35 4 27 LPort Trunk Conditioning Rx Conditioning Data 3 38 Rx Conditioning Mode 3 39 Rx Conditioning Signal 3 39 Rx Force Conditioning Mode 3 39 LSP properties 9 14 type 9 11 9 13 Lucent Trunk VPN 8 10 M Management PVCs 11 3 VPI VCIs 11 9 to 11 10 Management Permanent Virtual Circuit MPVC 11 3 configuring 11 4 Management ...

Страница 880: ...iguring 3 9 NPC function 3 33 overview 2 11 NNI DLCI 10 67 NNI see Network to Network Interface logical ports No Increase NI bit 5 7 5 9 Node prefixes configuring 17 30 ILMI eligible 16 8 Non disruptive logical port and trunk attributes 2 25 NPC see Network Parameter Control Number of valid bits in VPI VCI UNI logical ports 2 13 3 30 4 22 4 23 O OAM see Operations Administration and Maintenance al...

Страница 881: ...iguring fault tolerance 10 15 priority routing 10 28 10 62 CS IWU shaper 10 25 10 59 18 20 defining a new connection 10 13 to 10 33 EFCI mapping 10 65 enabling OAM alarms on 10 29 reroute balance 10 29 10 62 UPC function on 10 30 10 63 endpoint creation rules 10 4 FCP discard 10 28 10 62 frame discard 10 32 frame relay to ATM interworking 10 40 GX provisioning guidelines 10 2 manually defining cir...

Страница 882: ...39 Polling for ILMI 2 5 3 35 VCI 4 27 VPI 4 27 Polling period ILMI 4 27 Port prefixes configuring 17 41 to 17 53 custom AESA 17 47 DCC 17 44 defining a default route 17 52 E 164 AESA 17 45 ICD 17 44 ILMI eligible 16 8 native E 164 17 42 setting gateway addresses 17 49 security screening defined 1 5 Port security screening assigning screens 20 10 to 20 13 defined 20 2 egress screen mode 20 3 sample...

Страница 883: ... Service QoS for SVCs 3 56 parameters 10 55 setting for logical ports 3 51 R Rate Decrease Factor RDF 5 14 Rate enforcement 10 45 Rate Increase Factor RIF 5 14 Rate profile tables 6 8 description of 5 15 determining values D 2 Rate Decrease Exponent RDE 5 15 Rate Increase Exponent RIE 5 15 Redirect PVCs described 10 34 Reject delay 17 6 Reliable Scalable Circuit described 10 8 error messages F 1 R...

Страница 884: ...2 5 PVCs 10 24 10 58 10 79 12 9 18 18 SVC see switched virtual circuit Switched virtual circuits SVCs address registration 16 8 addresses DCC 17 60 E 164 AESA 17 61 ICD 17 60 native E 164 17 59 user part 17 67 anycast formats 16 2 automatic assignment of ESI bytes 17 55 configuring logical ports for SVCs 3 59 node prefixes 17 30 port prefixes 17 41 to 17 53 defining addresses 11 11 to 11 14 17 55 ...

Страница 885: ... to network interface Unspecified bit rate UBR 12 3 back pressure threshold 6 13 traffic managed by FCP 6 4 UPC see Usage Parameter Control Usage Parameter Control UPC enabling on PVCs 10 30 10 63 UNI logical ports 3 32 4 24 User parts SVC addresses 17 67 User to network interface UNI logical ports bandwidth policing 4 24 B STDX 4 15 to 4 53 number of valid bits in VPI VCI 4 22 4 23 CBX GX bandwid...

Страница 886: ...X 550 10 2 for PVCs 10 9 10 17 10 77 OPTimum frame trunks 4 16 setting for ATM circuits 10 49 setting valid bits 4 5 Virtual paths maximum allowed on UNI port 2 13 Virtual Private Network VPN configuring 13 4 configuring the trunk 7 23 8 46 Layer2 13 1 overview 13 1 Virtual UNI logical ports configuring 3 58 defined 2 11 VNN OSPF loopback address adding 7 47 VP shaping configuring for B STDX 4 6 c...

Страница 887: ...ins Road Westford MA 01886 What tasks did you perform using this guide If you were having trouble performing a task were you able to find the Were the examples and illustrations helpful for performing tasks If not how What did you like not like about the manual Was there any information you needed that was not in the manual If so how Do you have any other comments about the manual Page Description...

Страница 888: ......

Отзывы:

Нет отзывов

Похожие инструкции для CBX 3500

Бренд: WAGO Страницы: 56

Бренд: Alphatech Страницы: 38

Бренд: Quickie Страницы: 108

RainStation RS-0001

Бренд: EarthMinded Страницы: 16

Torque Master Plus 9100

Бренд: Wayne-Dalton Страницы: 44

Бренд: YeriSystems Страницы: 7

Бренд: PACH & COMPANY Страницы: 2

Бренд: Viking Страницы: 11

Бренд: LAON TECHNOLOGY Страницы: 40

4.3" Video Door Phone

Бренд: Alarmtec Страницы: 14

Бренд: Marmitek Страницы: 40

Бренд: NI Страницы: 28

Бренд: Sel Страницы: 12

Бренд: Jensen Страницы: 20

Бренд: Haklift Страницы: 32

JFLEX-Visualisation1

Бренд: Kontron Страницы: 19

Бренд: T+A Страницы: 70

Бренд: Schake Страницы: 2

Бренды по названию

0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z

Популярные бренды

Загрузить еще бренды